Service Manual: Fineline6

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 377

Service Manual

R1-R2

fineline6
CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION
I. SAFETY GUIDE (Precautions on Maintenance and Inspection) ..................................i
II. DESCRIPTION OF SIGNAL WORDS .........................................................................vii
II. ERLÄUTERUNG DER SIGNALWÖRTER....................................................................viii
III. DESCRIPTION OF WARNING AND CAUTION LABELS...........................................ix
III. BESCHREIBUNG VON WARNUNG-UND VORSICHT-ETIKETTEN..........................xii
IV. LIST OF WARNING AND CAUTION LABELS AND WHERE TO ATTACH.................xv

1. LOCATION DIAGRAM OF CIRCUIT BOARD..............................................................¡-1

2. IMPORTANT NOTICE WHEN YOU HANDLE BOARDS


OR POWER SUPPLY UNITS ......................................................................................™-1

3. EXPLANATION OF CIRCUIT BOARD.........................................................................£-1


■Input Station ............................................................................................................£-1
3-1. AFC-CPU Circuit Board (2700H1130).............................................................£-1
3-2. DC-TRM board (2700H1140) ..........................................................................£-7
3-3. SCANNER DRIVING board (56GA-9090-00)..................................................£-10
3-4. LS-LED-A board (2700H1100) ........................................................................£-12
3-5. LS-LED-B board (2700H1110) .......................................................................£-13
3-6. 135LED board (2700H1340) ..........................................................................£-15
3-7. SENS-A board (2700H1320)...........................................................................£-17
3-8. SENS-B board (2700H1330)...........................................................................£-18
3-9. 240LED board (2700H1380) ...........................................................................£-19
3-10. MAG-AMP board (2700H1390) .....................................................................£-20
3-11. PD-AMP board (2700H1300) ........................................................................£-22
3-12. FMS board (2700H1370) ..............................................................................£-26
3-13. LED-LAMP board (2700H1360) ....................................................................£-28
■Printer ......................................................................................................................£-29
3-14. HDC-PCI Circuit Board (2710H1000)............................................................£-29
3-15. HEAD-BUFF Circuit Board (2710H1010) ......................................................£-32
3-16. PRINTER-CPU Circuit Board (2710H1020) ..................................................£-41
3-17. LCD-CPU Circuit Board (2710H1030)...........................................................£-48
3-18. PSA Circuit Board (2710H1040) ...................................................................£-51
3-19. SDU-DRV Circuit Board (2710H1200) ..........................................................£-55
3-20. EFU-DRV Circuit Board (2710H1210)...........................................................£-59
3-21. PFU-DRV Circuit Board (2710H1230)...........................................................£-62
3-22. SCANNER DRIVING board (56GA-9090-00)................................................£-66
3-23. HEAD-TRM board (2710H1220) ...................................................................£-68
3-24. Fluorescent print head power supply board (271076903).............................£-70
3-25. Inverter board (584076302A) ........................................................................£-72
■Processor ................................................................................................................£-73
3-26. Processor-CPU (3590H1500) .......................................................................£-73
3-27. Processor-Drive (3850H1510).......................................................................£-89

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ....................................................................................................¢-1
4-1. BLOCK DIAGRAM ...............................................................................................¢-1
●DS-1000U/DS-100T/DS-1000 HARDWARE BLOCK DIAGRAM ........................¢-1
●DP-1000E/DP-1000 HARDWARE BLOCK DIAGRAM........................................¢-2
4-2. WIRING DIAGRAM..............................................................................................¢-3
●DS-1000/DS-1000U (1/2)....................................................................................¢-3
●DS-1000/DS-1000U (2/2)....................................................................................¢-4
●DS-1000T (1/2) ...................................................................................................¢-5
●DS-1000T (2/2) ...................................................................................................¢-6
●240AFC...............................................................................................................¢-7
●Universal Carrier .................................................................................................¢-8
●PRINTER (1/6)....................................................................................................¢-9
●PRINTER (2/6)....................................................................................................¢-10
●PRINTER (3/6)....................................................................................................¢-11
●PRINTER (4/6)....................................................................................................¢-12
●PRINTER (5/6)....................................................................................................¢-13
●PRINTER (6/6)....................................................................................................¢-14

5. EXPLANATION OF POWER SUPPLY UNIT ...............................................................∞-1


5-1. Input station .........................................................................................................∞-1
5-2. Printer Processor .................................................................................................∞-1
5-3. SUP1: Check procedures against a case where 5-volt power is not output ........∞-2

6. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF INPUT SECTION (DS-1000U/T).................§-1


6-1. Air filter.................................................................................................................§-1
6-1-1. Cleaning air filter (Monthly operation) ..........................................................§-1
6-2. Light source .........................................................................................................§-2
6-2-1. Cleaning dichroic mirror (Every three month) ..............................................§-2
6-2-2. Replacing diffusion film (upper) (Replace it as needed) ..............................§-3
6-2-3. Cleaning diffusion film (lower) (Monthly operation) ......................................§-4
6-2-4 Replacing LS-LED B and LS-LED A boards .................................................§-5
6-3. Film Scanner........................................................................................................§-6
6-3-1. Replacing scanning section .........................................................................§-6
6-3-2. Replacing driving speed changer.................................................................§-26
6-3-3. Check dirt on drive gears .............................................................................§-29
6-3-4. Replacing scanner driver board ...................................................................§-30
6-3-5. Replacing power supply ...............................................................................§-31
6-3-6. Replacing AFC CPU board/DC TRM board .................................................§-34
6-3-7. Replacing fan ...............................................................................................§-34
6-4. 135AFC................................................................................................................§-35
6-4-1. Replacing 135LED board .............................................................................§-35
6-4-2. Replacing PD-AMP board ............................................................................§-36
6-4-3. Cleaning sensor ...........................................................................................§-38
6-4.4. Cleaning the cleaning brushes (upper and lower)........................................§-39
6-4-5. Replacing timing belt....................................................................................§-41
6-4-6. Replacing rod lens .......................................................................................§-43
6-5. Input-unit PC ........................................................................................................§-44
6-5-1. Replacing input-unit PC ...............................................................................§-44

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF PRINTER SECTION (DP-1000E) ...............¶-1
7-1. Air filter.................................................................................................................¶-1
7-1-1. Cleaning air filter ..........................................................................................¶-1
7-2. Magazine Mounting section .................................................................................¶-3
7-2-1. Check and replace pin slide plate ................................................................¶-3
7-2-2. Replace light shield ......................................................................................¶-4
7-2-3. Check operation of lock lever .......................................................................¶-4
7-2-4. Clean photo sensor ......................................................................................¶-5
7-2-5. Clean and replace entrance sensors (two sensors).....................................¶-5
7-2-6. Clean and replace Magazine-Data board ....................................................¶-6
7-3. Operation Panel ...................................................................................................¶-7
7-3-1. Replacing LCD-CPU board and inverter power supply................................¶-7
7-3-2. Replacing operation touch panel and LCD module......................................¶-8
7-4. Printer-Unit PC.....................................................................................................¶-12
7-4-1. Replacing printer-unit PC.............................................................................¶-12
7-4-2. Replacing HDC-PCI board ..........................................................................¶-18
7-5. Sub drive..............................................................................................................¶-19
7-5-1. How to remove sub drive..............................................................................¶-19
7-5-2. Cleaning inside paper dust duct (Every six month)......................................¶-20
7-5-3. Cleaning flap plate sensor ...........................................................................¶-21
7-5-4. Replacing cutter unit ....................................................................................¶-23
7-5-5. Replacing three timing belts.........................................................................¶-25
7-5-6. Cleaning two cutter sensors, duct detection sensor,
and crimp-style solenoid sensors (upper and lower) ...................................¶-26
7-5-7. Cleaning rollers (annually) ...........................................................................¶-27
7-5-8. Replacing SDU-DRV board..........................................................................¶-31
7-6. Exposure unit / Exposure feed unit ......................................................................¶-32
7-6-1. Replacing exposure unit...............................................................................¶-32
7-6-2. Replacing cables (HBCN4 assembly (white),
HTCN1 assembly (black)), fluorescent printer head power
supply boards, and HEAD-TRM board ........................................................¶-49
7-6-3. Replacing boards (EFU DRIVE board and SCANNER DRIVER board) ......¶-52
7-6-4. Replacing timing belts (two belts) ................................................................¶-54
7-6-5. Greasing cams (Every one year) .................................................................¶-55
7-6-6. Cleaning press-fit sensor .............................................................................¶-55
7-7. Exposure processing section ...............................................................................¶-56
7-7-1. Replacing PRINTER-CPU board and/or HEAD-BUF board.........................¶-56
7-8. Feeding unit .........................................................................................................¶-57
7-8-1. How to remove feed unit ..............................................................................¶-57
7-8-2. Cleaning rollers and paper transfer surface (Yearly operation) ....................¶-58
7-8-3. Cleaning and replacing sensors...................................................................¶-59
7-8-4. Replacing timing belt and applying grease ..................................................¶-60
7-8-5. Replacing PFU-DRV board ..........................................................................¶-61
7-8-6. Replacing fan ...............................................................................................¶-61
7-8-7. Replacing print head ....................................................................................¶-62
7-9. Power supply........................................................................................................¶-63
7-9-1. Replacing power supply (including replacement of PSA board and fan) .....¶-63

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
8. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF PROCESSOR SECTION ............................•-1
8-1. J-module II ...........................................................................................................•-1
8-1-1. Cleaning and replacement procedure for the drum of J module II ...............•-1
8-1-2. Inspection and replacement procedures for J module II packing ASSY ......•-6
8-2. Checking the paper curls .....................................................................................•-12

9. REPLACING THE BATTERY (PC)...............................................................................ª-1


9-1. Replacing the Battery (KIC-1E) ...........................................................................ª-1

10. PERIODIC REPLACEMENT PARTS .........................................................................⁄0-1


● Yearly replacement parts........................................................................................⁄0-4
● Two-yearly replacement parts ................................................................................⁄0-4
● Three-yearly Replacement Parts............................................................................⁄0-5
● Miscellaneous Parts ...............................................................................................⁄0-6
● Drawing showing yearly replacement parts............................................................⁄0-7
● Drawing showing two-yearly replacement parts .....................................................⁄0-11
● Drawing showing three-yearly replacement parts ..................................................⁄0-18
● How to replace yearly replacement parts ...............................................................⁄0-21
10-1. Procedure for replacing bearing (385002426A) ............................................⁄0-21
10-2. Procedure for replacing water-absorbing roller (385002407B) .....................⁄0-22
10-3. Procedure for replacing idler gear (385002416B) .........................................⁄0-22
10-4. Procedure for replacing idler gear assembly (3850A2408C) ........................⁄0-23
10-5. Procedure for replacing gear (385002215B) .................................................⁄0-23
10-6. Procedure for replacing roller (C) (251602602A) ..........................................⁄0-24
● How to replace two-yearly replacement parts ........................................................⁄0-26
10-7. Procedure for replacing timing belt (rack drive shaft) (AAAA90200171) .......⁄0-26
10-8. Procedure for replacing gear (385002214A) .................................................⁄0-28
10-9. Procedure for replacing gear (385002216B) .................................................⁄0-30
10-10. Procedure for replacing idler gear (C) (355002635B) .................................⁄0-32
10-11. Procedure for replacing idler gear (A) (355002221B) .................................⁄0-33
10-12. Procedure for replacing bearing (AAAA90100184) .....................................⁄0-34
10-13. Procedure for replacing bearing (AAAA90100185) .....................................⁄0-35
10-14. Procedure for replacing gear (385002215B) ...............................................⁄0-36
10-15. Procedure for replacing loading spring (A) (355002444A) ..........................⁄0-38
10-16. Procedure for replacing idler gear (B) (355002425B) .................................⁄0-39
10-17. Procedure for replacing loading spring (C) (355002446A)..........................⁄0-40
10-18. Procedure for replacing filter retainer (temperature control bath)
(385001006A) .............................................................................................⁄0-41
10-19. Procedure for replacing anti-evaporation cover (3850A2202A)...................⁄0-42
10-20. Procedure for replacing helical wheel (left) (385002212B) .........................⁄0-42
10-21. Procedure for replacing helical wheel (right) (396033127B) .......................⁄0-43
10-22. Procedure for replacing worm gear (355002232A) .....................................⁄0-46
10-23. Procedure for replacing thrust washer (355002227A).................................⁄0-47
10-24. Procedure for replacing loading spring (355002260A)................................⁄0-48
10-25. Procedure for replacing loading spring (355002230A)................................⁄0-49
10-26. Procedure for replacing loading spring 121 (251602213A).........................⁄0-50
10-27. Procedure for replacing bearing (355002229A) ..........................................⁄0-51
10-28. Procedure for replacing gear E (355002251A)............................................⁄0-52

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-29. Procedure for replacing gear (355002213A) ...............................................⁄0-52
10-30. Procedure for replacing bearing (355002230A) ..........................................⁄0-53
10-31. Procedure for replacing bearing (355002234B) ..........................................⁄0-54
● How to replace three-yearly replacement parts......................................................⁄0-55
10-32. Procedure for replacing rubber roller (A) (385002401A) .............................⁄0-55
10-33. Procedure for replacing rubber roller (B) (385002432A) .............................⁄0-56
10-34. Procedure for replacing loading spring (B) (355002445B) ..........................⁄0-57
● Miscellaneous Parts ...............................................................................................⁄0-58
10-35. Procedure for replacing hooks (385002413A and 385002412A) ................⁄0-58
10-36. Procedure for cleaning diffuser film (top) (270002016C)
and light guide (top side) (270002018C).....................................................⁄0-59

11. APPLICATION DATA BACKUP AND RELOADING PROCEDURES ........................⁄1-1


11-1. Backing up Data.................................................................................................⁄1-1
11-1-1. Input station (When backing up the data to the A drive
on the FD drive:)........................................................................................⁄1-1
11-1-2. Backing up the printer data (When backing up the data to the
A drive on the FD drive:)............................................................................⁄1-3
11-2. Retrieving Data Backed up ................................................................................⁄1-5
11-2-1. Retrieval the data backed up from the input station
(When retrieving the data from the A drive on the FD drive:)....................⁄1-5
11-2-2. Retrieval the data backed up from the printer
(When retrieving the data from the A drive on the FD drive:)....................⁄1-7

12. R1 SUPER VERSION UP PROCEDURE FOR DS-1000 & DP-1000 .......................⁄2-1

13. EPSON ES-2200 UPGRADING PROCEDURE ........................................................⁄3-1


13-1. EPSON ES-2200 driver "2.1.0.100" installation procedure................................⁄3-1
13-2. EPSON ES-2200 driver upgrading procedure
from different firmware version to "2.1.0.100" ...................................................⁄3-6

14. FPGA PROGRAM WRITING PROCEDURE .............................................................⁄4-1

15. DS-1000 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE TO V1.03R01 BY


APPLICATION CD-ROM ...........................................................................................⁄5-1

16. DP-1000 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE TO V1.03R01 BY


APPLICATION CD-ROM ...........................................................................................⁄6-1

17. APPENDIX: CHECK SHEET .....................................................................................⁄7-1

2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
I. SAFETY GUIDE (Precautions on Maintenance and Inspection)

Precautions on installing and using this system


Read this manual carefully before using this system.
Before operating this system, make sure you understand and observe the following important
precautions.

1. This equipment is used to expose and process photographic paper by using exposed film and digital
media (e.g., CD-ROM, floppy disk, flatbed scanner). Do not use this equipment for other purposes.
2. To maintain safe and optimum functionality, operate this system properly according to the manual.
3. Keep this manual near the system, and always observe all precautions and follow all instructions.
4. Observe the warnings mentioned in this manual and caution labels. See “Safety Guide”, “Description
of Signal Words” and “Description of Warning and Caution Labels” for details.
5. Do not install this system on an inclined or otherwise uneven floor, and avoid direct exposure to the
sunlight. Do not position any lighting fixtures within 2m from the negative film carrier.
6. Be sure to install a ventilating fan in the room where this equipment is installed to protect the
operators against gas, heat, odor and high humidity.
7. This system is not equipped with a cooling unit. Be sure to use in the following environment.
Operate this system under an ambient temperature of 18°C-28°C and relative humidity of 30%-80%.
8. Since this system is grounded with a three-wire power cord, do not disconnect the grounding wire in
order to avoid electric shock.
9. There are ventilating holes on the cabinet to prevent rises in temperature. Never block these holes
with any objects.
10. Never stick your hands or any objects into the ventilation holes because the ventilating fans are
operating. Electric shock or other injury may result. Also refrain from touching the processor's printer
connector when the equipment is turned on.
11. In the case of continuous use for long hours, take a rest for around 10 minutes by one hour to
give your eyes a rest.
12. Use the monitor at the distance of 80 cm in a bright room.
Avoid using at the place where the sun ray or light reflects at the right angle.
13. Do not turn the processor on without docking it with the printer.
14. Be sure to contact your service engineer when installing, collecting, relocating or repacking the
equipment.
15. Do not peel caution labels off the system.
16. Should the manual or any caution label be damaged, replace with new ones.
17. To purchase additional manuals or caution labels, contact your nearest Konica dealer.

Should any trouble occur

1 Turn off the power switch on the system



2 Turn off the breaker on the distribution panel

3 Contact Konica

2700YE600C
i Mar. 2003

fineline6
Precautions for Processing Solution

1. Some tablets and processing solutions (concentrate solutions and solutions used, hereafter referred
to as processing solutions) use non-medicinal poisonous chemicals which are irritants and / or which
may be harmful if swallowed. Some processing solutions may also be skin or eye irritants, and may
cause allergic reactions with repeated exposure. Please use care when handling tablets and
processing solutions.

2. Wear safety goggles, gloves, and work clothes when handling processing solution to prevent direct
contact with your skin. Also, make sure that the work area contains ventilation fans, and is properly
ventilated when working with processing solutions.

3. If you directly touch the solution in tanks or processing solution, or if you conduct operation that may
lead to direct contact, wash your hands with soap and plenty of water after completing operation.

4. Processing solution may discolored or otherwise stain clothing.

5. Emergency measures for processing solution.

• Should tablets or processing solution be swallowed, rinse your mouth out with water or drink one or
two cups (180ml or more) of water. When instructed to do so by a doctor, induce vomiting to
disgorge swallowed tablets or processing solution, then seek immediate medical treatment.

• Should processing solution get into your eyes, immediately wash your eyes out in running water for
15 minutes, then seek immediate medical treatment.

• If you touch processing solution directly, wash it off with a plenty of water. If any symptoms appear,
consult a physician. There is a possibility of agents causing allergic reactions with repeated
exposure.

6. Do not mix with hypochlorites (industrial or household bleach).

7. Dispose of package for processing solution in accordance with state and local regulations.

8. Please have disposal of chemicals performed by an authorized chemical disposal agent.

2700YE600C
ii Mar. 2003

fineline6
Precautions for Disposal of This System and Packing Materials

Precautions for Disposal of This System

When disposing of this machine, consult federal state and/or local regulations for the proper
disposal method.

• When disposing of the equipment, be sure to treat it as follows before delivering it to the waste
collector.
• Remove processing solution and carefully wash each rack and processing tank.
• Cut pipe hoses, remove remaining solution and wash carefully.
• Be careful not to allow the processing solution to leak into the environment.

• Dispose of process filters after completely washing them.

• Collection and recycling of the personal computer used in this machine is the responsibility of the
computer maker.

• The backup battery (lead acid battery) used with this equipment must be disposed of in accordance with
state and local regulations.

• Please contact your contract-specified maintenance company for removal, collection, and recycling.

• The battery must be removed (replaced or disposed of) by a service engineer; contact your local
maintenance company.

• Regarding the method of disposal, be sure to observe the applicable laws and regulations of your
country or state.

• The accessory hardware keys may no longer be necessary in the case of having purchased multiple
options. In consideration of recent regulations on industrial waste, a service engineer will collect any
hardware keys no longer required and take responsibility for disposing of them in the proper manner.
Your understanding and cooperation are appreciated.

Precautions for Disposal of Packing Materials

• Regarding the method of packaging materials disposal, be sure to observe the applicable laws and
regulations of your country or state.

• Since resin-containing package materials may be considered regulated wastes, be sure to deliver
them to authorized collectors of regulated wastes.

2700YE600C
iii Mar. 2003

fineline6
Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection

This system has been checked in accordance with laws pertaining to various product safety regulations
before leaving the factory. Be sure to observe the following precautions whenever servicing this system.

1. Never perform any unspecified dissembling, modification, adjustment, or servicing with parts not
specified in the manual.
Never open or remove any unspecified covers because you may expose yourself to high voltage
resulting in electric shock and serious burns.

2. Be sure to turn off all power sources when performing specified maintenance as outlined in the
manual.
If the power is not turned off, you may expose yourself to electric shock or other injury.

3. Do not run the power cord through locations where the cord may be crushed or stepped on.

4. When unplugging the power cord, make sure that the power has been completely turned off, and
remove the plug from the socket by pulling on the plug connector section, not the power cable.
(Use the same method for plugging in the unit)

5. Use a dry cloth for cleaning. Should water spill inside the equipment, turn the power off and
contact the Konica Service Department.

6. Make sure that all screw and parts that are removed for maintenance are put back into place
before turning the power back on.

7. Before moving this system, turn the power off, then disconnect the power cord and connection
cables. Be sure to drain all processing solution from each tank before moving this system.

8. Check for dust in the plug and socket of the power cord. Perform cleaning once a year.

9. Never modify or alter this system for any reason.

10. Do not use unspecified replacement parts.

11. Precautions on Heating Sections (Units)

• The lamp, which is used as a light source, the chemical solution heater, drying heater and
motors all generate heat.
Be sure that these parts have fully cooled down before initiating maintenance and inspection.

• Regarding the lamp, turn off the lamp and allow it to cool for 15 minutes. Once the temperature
has dropped, turn off the breaker and main power switch before starting the maintenance
activity.The cooling time for the heaters and motors varies depending on the duration of
operation. After turning off the breaker and main power switch of this equipment, allow sufficient
cooling time before starting operation.

• If you burn yourself, immediately cool the burned area under running water and seek medical
treatment.

2700YE600C
iv Mar. 2003

fineline6
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Due to the potential danger to an inexperienced person servicing this system, as well as the risk of
damaging the system, KONICA CORPORATION, Japan, strongly recommends that all servicing only
be performed by the Konica-trained service engineers.

Should any user (trained by Konica) need to perform an emergency operation not specified in the
Instruction Manual or User Maintenance Manual, first contact Konica to receive instructions before
performing the operation. At the same time, be sure to observe the following general precautions.

1. Turn off all power sources.


2. Do not use fuses other than those of the specified ratings.
3. Never modify any electric circuit, for any reason.
4. Never pull out cords when removing connectors.
5. Do not step on the power cord or otherwise crush it.
6. After parts replacement or maintenance, be careful not to touch the burrs or sharp edges of the
casing when wiring. Never touch movable parts or the drive section, in particular, when wiring.
7. Carefully clean off any electric parts contaminated with processing solution.
8. When removing any unit this system, always disconnect and reinstall the unit by holding the metal
part or green marked part of its body to prevent the breakage.
9. Before removing circuit boards, switches or sensors in the system, discharge static electricity from
your body by touching other metal part of the system.
10. Never perform unspecified maintenance or modification.
11. Do not use unspecified replacement parts.
12. Make sure that screws and parts removed for maintenance are set back into place.
13. Do not make the interlock switch ineffective by inserting paper or other material.

Cautions for lithium battery


The lithium battery mounted on the mother board is designed as a replaceable battery.
This battery has a built-in combustible substance such as lithium and organic solvent. If you make a
mistake in replacement method, heat generation, ignition or rupture may occur. Replace the battery
with the one having a correct rating.
• Lithium battery: Model CR2023
When you have to replace the battery (lithium battery), be sure to contact a service engineer.
Replacement must be made by a service engineer.

The backup battery (sealed lead battery) contained in this


equipment is automatically charged when power is turned on.
Be sure to contact your service engineer when replacing the
battery.

Pb
• CONTAINS SEALED LEAD BATTERY.
• BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED.
• シール鉛電池が含まれています。
• 電池は必ず再利用してください。

2700YE600C
v Mar. 2003

fineline6
For R1 SUPER U

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital
apparatus a set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of
Communications.

2700YE600C
vi Mar. 2003

fineline6
II. DESCRIPTION OF SIGNAL WORDS

Description of Signal Words

• Signal words indicate the levels of potential danger.

• Signal word contains the following three levels of danger, which are used properly according to the
probability and seriousness of damage to be caused by the danger.

Danger: Indicates an urgent situation that will likely result in death or serious injury should the
problem not be corrected.
Warning: Indicates a dangerous situation that is likely to result in death or serious injury should the
problem not be corrected.
Caution: Indicates a dangerous situation that may result in medium-scale damage or slight injury
should the problem not be corrected. It is also used when only property damage is
anticipated.

Probability of damage

Damage is caused. Damage may be cause.


(High probability) (Low probability)

Death or serious
Injury
injury (Damage Danger Warning
is serious.)
(and physical
Medium or slight
damage) Warning or
injury (Damage Caution
is slight.) Caution
Physical damage only Caution

Serious injury above refers to loss of eyesight, wounds, burns (low and high temperature),
electronic shock, bone fracture, or poisoning, which cause aftereffects or require medical
treatment as an outpatient or long hospitalization. Medium or slight injury refers to wounds
burns and electric shock which do not require medical treatment as an outpatient or long
hospitalization. Physical damage refers to any damage caused to houses or household
items, or injury to domestic livestocks or pets.

• Description of warning and caution in the manual

(1) Warning is described in Chapter VI, “LIST OF WARNING AND CAUTION LABELS AND WHERE
TO ATTACH.”
(2) Caution is described in Chapter VI, “LIST OF WARNING AND CAUTION LABELS AND WHERE
TO ATTACH.” or described by the following method.

CAUTION

2700YE600C
vii Mar. 2003

fineline6
II. ERLÄUTERUNG DER SIGNALWÖRTER

ERLÄUTERUNG DER SIGNALWÖRTER


• Ein Signalwort weist auf den bei diesem Produkt vorherrschenden Gefahrengrad hin.
• Die Signalbegriffe umfassen drei Gefahrenstufen, die sich durch den Grad der Wahrsheinlichkeit
und des möglichen Schadens unterschieden.

GEFAHR : Weist auf eine extrem gefährliche Situation hin, die zu schweren oder tödlichen
Verletzungen fühern kann, wenn die Problemursache nicht beseitigt wird.
WARNUG : Zeigt eine gefährliche Situation an, die zu schweren oder tödlichen Verletzungen
führen kann, wenn die Problemusache nicht beseitigt wird.
VORSICHT : Zeight eine gefährliche Situation an, die zu leichten Verletzungen oder mäßigen
Schäden führen kann, wenn die Problemursache nicht beseitigt wird. Dieser
Hinweis ercheint auch dann, wenn ausschließlich Sachschäden zu befürchten
sind.

Wahrscheinlichkeit der Beschädigung

Beschädigung mit Beschädigung ist


Sicherheit anzunehmen anzunehmen (niedrige
(hohe Wahrscheinlichkeit) Wahrscheinlichkeit)

Schwere oder tödliche


Verletzungen (starke GEFAHR WARNUNG
Verletzungsgefahr Beschädigung der Anlage).
(und Beschädigung
der Anlage) Leichte oder mittelschwere
WARNUNG oder
Verletzungen (leichte VORSICHT
Beschädigung der Anlage). VORSICHT
Nur Beschädigung der Anlage VORSICHT

Die Bezeichnung “schwere Verletzungen” umfaßt Verlust des Augenlichts, äußere


Verwundendungen, Verbrennungen (hohe oder niedrige Temperaturen), Elektroschock,
Knochenbrüche und Vergiftungen, soweit sie schädliche Wirkungen hinterlassen oder
medizinische Behandlung (ambulant) oder Krankenhausaufenthalt nach sich ziehen.
Zu leichteren “Verletzungen” zählen Verbrennungen und Elektroschock, soweit sie keine
schädlichen Wirkungen hinterlassen bzw. keine ambulante medizinische Behandlung oder
Krankenhausaufenthalt nach sich ziehen. Unter den Begriff “Sachschäden” fallen Schäden
an einem Gebäude oder an Haushaltsgegenständen sowie Verletzungen von Haustieren.

2700YE600C
viii Mar. 2003

fineline6
III. DESCRIPTION OF WARNING AND CAUTION LABELS

Description of Warning and Caution Labels

• Regarding system and tablets or processing solution (concentrate solution and solution used),
labels and marks are used to explain precautions. Before operating this system, fully understand
the meanings of these labels and marks to perform safe operation.

Example of the Warning Label

1 Signal word

3 Description of
2 Symbol marks signal word
of signal word

1 Warning and Caution Labels

Display method Meaning

WARNING Incorrect operation may cause death or serious injury.

Incorrect operation may cause slight or minor injury, or physical


CAUTION
damage.

2 Symbol Mark

Symbol Mark Meaning

Indicates “Prohibition”

Indicates “Warning” or “Caution”

Indicates “Mandatory action”

2700YE600C
ix Mar. 2003

fineline6
3 Example of Using Symbol Marks

Symbol marks used mainly for tablets or processing solution (concentrate solution and solution used).

Symbol Mark Meaning

Caution (Warning) Mark:


Harmful (poisonous) or irritating to the human body.

Caution (Warning) Mark:


There is risk of skin corrosion.

Mandatory action Mark:


Wear protective goggles when handling.

Mandatory action Mark:


Wear protective gloves when handling.

Caution (Warning) Mark:


This mark calls attention to operation precautions. Carefully read and
understand the text (description) on the label before performing
operation.

2700YE600C
x Mar. 2003

fineline6
Symbol marks used mainly for equipment.

Symbol Mark Meaning

Caution (Warning) Mark:


This mark calls attention to operation precautions. Carefully read and
understand the text (description) on the label before performing
operation.

Caution Mark:
Risk of electric shock due to high voltage.

Caution Mark:
Risk of serious burn due to very hot section.

Prohibition Mark:
Do not insert your hands, since you may be cut.

2700YE600C
xi Mar. 2003

fineline6
III. BESCHREIBUNG VON WARNUNG- UND VORSICHT-ETIKETTEN

BESCHREIBUNG VON WARNUNG- UND VORSICHT-ETIKETTEN

• Zur Sicherheit der Ausrüstung und der Tabletten oder der Entwicklungslösung
(Konzentrationslösung und Lösung verwendet) dienen verschiedentliche Etiketten und Symbole.
Bitte machen Sie sich vor der Inbetriebnahme gründlich mit der Bedeutung dieser Etiketten und
Symbole vertraut.
Beispiel des warnenden Aufklebers

1 Signalbegriff

3 Erklärung des
2 Symbole zum Signalbegriffs
Signalbegriff

1 Warnung- und Vorsich-Etiketten

Darstellung Bedeutung

WARNUNG Falsche Handhabung verursacht schwere oder tödliche Verletzungen.

Falsche Handhabung verursacht verursacht leichte Verletzungen


VORSICHT
oder Sachschäden.

2 Symbol Mark

Symbol Bedeutung

Bedeute “Verboten”

Bedeutet “Warnung” oder “Vorsicht”

Bedeute “Unbedingte Vorschrift”

2700YE600C
xii Mar. 2003

fineline6
3 Beispiele für Symbole

Symbole sind hauptsächlich für Tabletten oder Entwicklungslösung (Konzentrationslösung und Lösung
verwendet) angebracht.

Symbol Bedeutung

Symbole für Vorsicht (Warnung):


Ist für Menschen schädlich (giftig) oder hat Reizwirkung.

Symbol für Vorsicht (Warnung):


Es besteht die Gefahr ätzender Hautreizung.

Symbol für unbedingte Vorschrift:


Bei der Handhabung unbedingt Schutzbrille tragen.

Symbol für unbedingte Vorschrift:


Bei der handhabung unbedingt Schutzhandschue tragen.

Symbol für Vorsicht (Warnung):


Dieses Symbol weist auf wichtige Vorsichtsmaßregeln hin.
Bitte lesen Sie den Etikettentext (Beschreibung) genau durch, bevor
Sie den nächsten Arbeitsschritt ausführen.

2700YE600C
xiii Mar. 2003

fineline6
Hauptsächlich auf Ausrüstungsteilen angebrachte Symbole.

Symbol Bedeutung

Symbol für Vorsicht (Warnung):


Dieses Symbol weist auf wichtige Vorsichtsmaßregeln hin.
Bitte lesen Sie den Etikettentext (Beschreibung) genau durch, bevor
Sie den nächsten Arbeitsschritt ausführen.

Symbol für Vorsicht:


Es besteht Hochspannung und damit Elektroschockgefahr.

Symbol für Vorsicht:


Es besteht die Gefahr von Verbrennungen an erhitzten Teilen.

Symbol für Verbot:


Nicht mit der Hand hineignreifen; es besteht Schnittverletzungsgefahr.

2700YE600C
xiv Mar. 2003

fineline6
IV. LIST OF WARNING AND CAUTION LABELS AND WHERE TO ATTACH

WARNING
*1 E: Except NEMKO Standard and UL Standard
C: NEMKO Standard
U: UL Standard

Label
Parts No. Operation Label Location*1
Handling overflow Do not drink this liquid. W-1
Do not remove this label from this plastic tank.

#367050021A E
(For User)

#359450005A C
WARNING/WARNUNG
(For User)

Do not drink this liquid.


Do not remove this label from this plastic tank.

NIEMALS diese Flüssigkeit trinken!


KEINESFALLS diesen Aufkleber vom
Kunststoffbehälter entfernen.

#359454004A U
(For User)

2700YE600C
– xv – Mar. 2003

fineline6
Label
Parts No. Operation Label Location*1
Replacing the Cutter blade is located below. W-2
cutter blade Turn OFF the power switch before touching this area, and before
changing or removing the blade or jammed paper.

#271050001A E
(For Engineer) C
U

Handling When mixing or handling chemicals or overflow solutions, wear W-3


safety goggles and rubber gloves. If chemicals get in your eyes or
chemicals or on your skin, rinse immediately with lots of water.
overflow solution
#367050022A E
(For User)

#357050101A WARNING / WARNUNG C


(For User) When mixing or handling chemicals
or overflow solutions, wear safety goggles and
rubber gloves. If chemicals get in your eyes or
on your skin, rinse immediately with lots of
water.

Bei der Handhabung von Chemikalien oder


Lösungen unbedingt eine Schutzbrille und
Gummihandschuhe tragen!
Bei Augen-oder Hautkontakt die Chemikalien
sofort mit reichlich Wasser abspülen.

#357054101A U
WARINING / ADVERTENCIA
(For User) When mixing or handling chemicals
or overflow solutions, wear safety goggles and
rubber gloves. If chemicals get in your eyes or
on your skin, rinse immediately with lots of
water.

Cuando mazcle ó manipule productos


químicos ó soluciones de sobrellenado, utilice
gafas protectoras y guantes de caucho. Si
estos productos químicos netran en sus ojos
ó tocan su piel, lávelos inmediatamente con
abundante cantidad de agua.

2700YE600C
– xvi – Mar. 2003

fineline6
Label
Parts No. Operation Label Location*1

Handling When you have to directly handle ECOJET or processing solutions, W-4
or when you have to touch ECOJET powder or processing
ECOJET solutions to disassemble or clean the ECOJET shooter or module
drum, wear gloves and protective goggles for safety. If chemicals
contact eyes or skin, wash off with water for 15 minutes.
Get medical attention. Chemicals may cause skin irritation.

#2780850006A E
(For User)

#253450027A C
(For User)

#253450029A U
(For User)

2700YE600C
– xvii – Mar. 2003

fineline6
Label
Parts No. Operation Label Location*1
Replacing the Do not eat ECOJET tablets or drink solutions. In case tablets or W-5
cartridge chemicals are swallowed, rinse mouth with water, drink one or two
cups (180ml or more) of water, and get medical attention immediately.

#359056006A E
(For User)
WARNING / 警 告
Do not eat ECOJET tablets or
drink solutions. In case tablets
or chemicals are swallowed,
rinse mouth with water, drink
one or two cups of water, and
get medical attention
immediately.

万一、誤ってエコジェットや
処理液を飲み込んだ場合には、
直ちに口をすすぎ、コップ1∼
2杯の水を飲み、速やかに医師
の診断を受けて下さい。

#359450004A C
(For User) WARNING / WARNUNG
Do not eat ECOJET tablets or drink
solutions. In case tablets or
chemicals are swallowed, rinse
mouth with water, drink one or two
cups of water, and get medical
attention immediately.

ECOJET-Tabletten und -Lösungen


dürfen auf keinen Fall verschluckt
werden. Falls dennoch einmal
Tabletten oder Chemikalien
verschluckt werden, den Mund mit
Wasser ausspülen, ein oder zwei
Glas Wasser trinken und sofort
einen Arzt aufsuchen.

#3594540003A U
(For User) WARNING / ADVERTENCIA
Do not eat ECOJET tablets or drink
solutions. In case tablets or
chemicals are swallowed, rinse
mouth with water, drink one or two
cups of water, and get medical
attention immediately.

No ingerir nunca tabletas ECOJET


ni soluciones. En caso de ingerirse
accidentalmente, enjuaguar la boca
con gaua, beber uno o dos vasos
de agua y acudir al médico
inmediatamente.

2700YE600C
– xviii – Mar. 2003

fineline6
Label
Parts No. Operation Label Location*1
Replacing the Always wear safety gloves and protective glasses when handling W-6
cartridge or ECOJET tablet and solution directly. If ECOJET tablet or solution
handling spilled on the skin or get into eyes, wash it off with running water for
processing more than 15 minutes. If swallowed, rinse the mouth with water, drink
solution one or two cups of water, and get medical treatment immediately.

#278050004A E
(For User)

#253450018A C
(For User)
WARNING / WARNUNG
Always wear safety gloves and protective glasses when handling
ECOJET tablet and solution directly. If ECOJET tablet or solution s
pilled on the skin or get into eyes, wash it off with running
water for more than 15 minutes. If swallowed, rinse the mouth with
water, drink one or two cups of water, and get medical treatment
immediately.

Grundsätzlich Schutzhandschuhe und Schutzbrille tragen, wenn mit


ECOJET-Tabletten und -Lösung hantiert wird. Falls ECOJET-Tabletten
oder -Lösung auf die Haut oder in die Augen gerät, sofort mindestens
15 Minuten lang unter fließendem Wasser abspülen. Falls diese
Tabletten oder Lösung verschluckt wurde, den Mund mit Wasser
ausspülen, ein oder zwei Glas Wasser trinken und sofort einen Arzt
rufen.

#253450019A U
(For User)
WARNING / ADVERTENCIA
Always wear safety gloves and protective glasses when handling
ECOJET tablet and solution directly. If ECOJET tablet or solution s
pilled on the skin or get into eyes, wash it off with running
water for more than 15 minutes. If swallowed, rinse the mouth with
water, drink one or two cups of water, and get medical treatment
immediately.

Siempre usar guantes de seguridad y gafas protoctoras para


manipular directamente soluciones o tabletas ECOJET. Si la
solución o la tableta ECOJET llegara a entrar en contacto con
su piel o sus ojos, lavar con abundante cantidad de agua durante 15
minutos. De ingerirse, enjuagar la boca con agua, beber uno o dos
vasos de agua, y acudir inmediatamente al médico.

2700YE600C
– xix – Mar. 2003

fineline6
CAUTION
*1 E: Except NEMKO Standard and UL Standard
C: NEMKO Standard
U: UL Standard

Label
Parts No. Operation Label Location*1
Carrying and You may drop the paper magazine on your feet or injure your fingers at installation, if C-1
setting the paper you fail to hold the magazine with one hand on the handle and the other on the part
supply magazine marked in green.

#366052007A E
C
(For User) U

Interlock switch Do not place or insert any object into this space. C-2
Do not disable this safety device.

#271050002A Do not place or


E
insert any object C
(For Engineer) into this space. U
Do not disable
this safety device.

異物挿入禁止。
安全装置を作動
不可にするな。

Handling top C-3


cover
CAUTION / 注意 / PRECAICION /
VORSICHT / ATTENTION / CAUTELA E
#271050003A
C
(For User) U

2700YE600C
– xx – Mar. 2003

fineline6
Label
Parts No. Operation Label Location*1

Removing dryer The dryer rack cover is HOT. Before touching cover or removing C-4
rack dryer rack unit, turn the power switch OFF and wait 10 minutes to let
the rack cover and rack cool.

#359056008A E
(For Engineer)

#359450008A C
CAUTION / VORSICHT
(For Engineer)
Dryer rack cover is HOT. Before touching
cover or removing dryer rack unit, turn the
machine's power OFF and wait 10 minutes to
let the rack cover and rack cool.

HEISSE Trockner-Rack-Abdeckung!
Vor Berühren der Abdeckung oder Entfernen
des Trockners den Strom ausschalten und 10
Minuten abkühlen lassen.

#359454007A U
CAUTION / PRECAUCION
(For Engineer)
Dryer rack cover is HOT. Before touching
cover or removing dryer rack unit, turn the
machine's power OFF and wait 10 minutes to
let the rack cover and rack cool.

La cubierta de la parrilla de secado está


CALIENTE. Antes de tocar la cubierta ó de
desmontar la parrilla de secado, desconecte
la máquina y espere 10 minutos para que se
enfríen la cubierta y la parrilla.

Removing dryer Dryer rack unit is heavy. Hold it by the bars marked with green labels C-5
rack when removing or replacing the unit.
#359056009A E
(For Engineer)

#359450006A C
(For Engineer)
CAUTION / VORSICHT
Dryer rack unit is heavy. Hold it by the
bars marked with green labels when
removing or replacing the unit.

CAUTION Schwere Trockner-Rack-Einheit!


Weight : 15Kg Beim Ein-/Ausbau der Einheit nur an
VORSICHT die Stange mit dem grünen Aufkleber
Gewicht : 15Kg fassen.

#359454005A U
(For Engineer)
CAUTION / PRECAUCION
Dryer rack unit is heavy. Hold it by the
bars marked with green labels when
removing or replacing the unit.

CAUTION La unidad de la parrilla de secado es


Weight : 15Kg pesada. Levántela por las barras
PRECAUCION marcadas con las etiquetas verdes
Peso : 15Kg para sacar ó volver a instalar la unidad.

2700YE600C
– xxi – Mar. 2003

fineline6
Label
Parts No. Operation Label Location*1

Removing prints Print sorting rods move at high speed when prints are delivered from C-6
the printer. Keep your hands away from these rods when printer is
operation.

#253650003A E
(For User) CAUTION /
Print sorting rods move at high speed
when prints are delivered from the
printer. Keep your hands away from
these rods when printer is operation.



#253450003B C
(For User) CAUTION / VORSICHT
CAUTION
Print sorting rods move at high speed
when prints are delivered from the
printer. Keep your hands away from
these rods when printer is operation.

VORSICHT
Bei der Bildausgabe bewegt sich die
Sortiereinrichtung mit hoher
Geschwindigkeit. Daher während des
Betriebes keinesfalls die Sortierstangen berühren!

#253450014B U
(For User) CAUTION / PRECAUCION
CAUTION
Print sorting rods move at high speed when prints
are delivered from the printer. Keep your hands
away from these rods when printer is operation.

PRECAUCION
Los rodillos de clasificación de las fotografías van
girando a gran velocidad cuando las fotos salen de
la impresora. Mantenga las manos fuera del
alcance de estos rodillos cuando la impresora está
funcionando.

2700YE600C
– xxii – Mar. 2003

fineline6
Label
Parts No. Operation Label Location*1

Paper jam Do not place or insert any object into this space. C-7
Do not disable this safety device.
#364057003A E
(For Engineer)

#362452002A C
(For Engineer)

CAUTION
Do not place or
insert any object into
this space.
Do not disable this
safety device.

VORSICHT
Niemals den
Türschalter
überbrücken!
Keine Teile in diesem
Bereich einsetzen.

#359454025A U
(For Engineer)

CAUTION
Do not place or
insert any object into this
space.
Do not disable this safety
device.

PECAUCION
No coloque ó introduzca
ningún objeto en este
espacio.
No desactive el
dispositivo de seguridad.

2700YE600C
– xxiii – Mar. 2003

fineline6
Label
Parts No. Operation Label Location*1

Replacing the High voltage! Turn power off before replacing fuses. C-8
fuse
#359056010A E
(For Engineer)
CAUTION / 注 意
High voltage! Turn power off before
replacing fuses.

感電の恐れがあります!
ヒューズ交換時は、必ず電源ブレーカ
ーをOFFにしてから作業を行なってく
ださい。

#359450009A C
(For Engineer) CAUTION / VORSICHT

High voltage! Turn power off


before replacing fuses.

Hochspannung! Vor dem


Auswechseln der Sicherungen
den Netzstrom abschalten.

#359454008A U
(For Engineer) CAUTION / PRECAUCION

High voltage! Turn power off before


replacing fuses.

Alta tensión! Desconectar el


interruptor antes de
reemplazar los fusibles.

Handling power Turn OFF the power switch before touching this area. C-9
switch

#367050020A E
(For Engineer)

#359450011A CAUTION / VORSICHT C


(For Engineer) Turn OFF the power switch before
touching this area.

Vor Beruhren dieses Bereichs ist der


Netzschalter auszuschalten.

#359454009A CAUTION/PRECAUCION U
(For Engineer) Turn OFF the power switch before
touching this area.

Desconecte el interrupor de
alimentación antes de tocar esta área.

2700YE600C
– xxiv – Mar. 2003

fineline6
Label
Parts No. Operation Label Location*1
Opening the Do not open the external cover. (Only service engineers are permitted C-10
external cover to open the external cover) When a service engineer opens the
external cover, must turn off the power switch before starting
maintenance.
#38505008A E
(For Engineer) C
U

2700YE600C
– xxv – Mar. 2003

fineline6
Label
Parts No. Operation Label Location*1
Handling drum You may pinch your hand. C-11
unit Do not put your hand into the drum unit.

#278050005A E
(For User)

#253450023A C
(For User)

#253450025A U
(For User)

2700YE600C
– xxvi – Mar. 2003

fineline6
Label
Parts No. Operation Label Location*1
Handling the light When removing the light source, turn off the power, and wait 15 C-12
source unit minutes before beginning removal procedures.

#270050004A
CAUTION E
(For User) C
注意
U
Wh e n r e m o v i n g t h e
light source, turn
off the power,
and wait 15 minutes
before begining
removal procedures.
光源部を取り外す時は
電源をOFFにし、15分後に
作業を行ってください。

2700YE600C
– xxvii – Mar. 2003

fineline6
J Type Film scanner
<Front surface of
W-4 the body>
Printer/Processor
<Top surface of the body> W-5
C-7

C-6

C-5

C-4
C-12
C-3
W-5
W-4 C-11

Processor
<Side surface of the body>
Printer/Processor
<Front surface of the body> C-6 C-10

C-2
W-2

W-6

C-1 C-9
C-8

• Paper Magazine • Overflow Tank W-1

C-1

2700YE600C
– xxviii – Mar. 2003

fineline6
SQA Type Film scanner
<Front surface of
the body>
Printer/Processor
<Top surface of the body>
C-7

C-6

C-5

C-4
C-12
C-3
W-3

Processor
<Side surface of the body>
Printer/Processor
<Front surface of the body> C-6 C-10

C-2
W-2

W-3

C-1 C-9
C-8

• Paper Magazine • Overflow Tank W-1

C-1 W-3

2700YE600C
– xxix – Mar. 2003

fineline6
1. LOCATION DIAGRAM OF CIRCUIT BOARD

INVERTER BOARD
(584076302A) HEAD-BUF BOARD LCD-CPU BOARD
(2710H1010) (2710H1030)

PRINTER-CPU BOARD
(2710H1020) PRINTER SECTION

PC LCD-CPU BOARD
(2710H1030)
SECTION
HDC-PCI BOARD HEAD-TRM BOARD
(2710H1000) (2710H1220)

PFU-DRV BOARD
(2710H1230)

FLUORESCENT PRINT HEAD


POWER SUPPLY BOARD x 2
(271076903)

SUP1 - SUP5
PSA BOARD SCANNER DRIVER BOARD
(2710H1040) SDU-DRV BOARD (56GA-9090-00)
(2710H1200)
EFU-DRV BOARD
(2710H1210)

Printer Printer
<Side surface of the body> <Front surface of the body>

SCANNER DRIVER BOARD SCANNER DRIVER BOARD


(56GA-9090-00) (56GA-9090-00)

AFC-CPU BOARD
(2700H1130)

LS-LED A
(2700H1100)

DC-TRM
(2700H1140)
LS-LED A
(2700H1100)
SUP2

SUP1
LS-LED B
LS-LED B (2700H1110)
(2700H1110) Film scanner Film scanner
<Side surface of the body> <Front surface of the body>

¡-1 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
2. IMPORTANT NOTICE WHEN YOU HANDLE BOARDS OR POWER SUPPLY UNITS

IMPORTANT:
• Turn off all power sources.
• When unplugging the power cord, make sure that the power has been
completely turned off, and remove the plug from the socket by pulling on the
plug connector section, not the power cable. (Use the same method for
plugging in the unit)
• Before removing circuit boards, switches or sensors in the system, discharge
static electricity from your body by touching other metal part of the system.
• When adjusting a board or a replacing a power supply unit, use a ceramic
screwdriver. Do not use a metal screwdriver.

™-1 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3. EXPLANATION OF CIRCUIT BOARD

■Input Station

3-1. AFC-CPU Circuit Board (2700H1130)


1. What it does

Receives commands from the KIC-1 imaging unit, and controls the film carrier and imaging
illuminants.

2. External view and functions

(1) External view

(2) Dimensions.
155mm x 280mm x about 30mm (with six mounting holes).

(3) Functions
CPU: HD64F2339 (24.576MHz clock).
SRAM: 128KB.
I/O:
・Analog input 8 channels.
・Logical input 20 channels.
・+5V output 12 channels.
・+24V output 32 channels.
・Serial communication (RS-232-C) 3 channels.

3. Power supply
(1) +5V 2A(max)
(2) +15V 0.4 A(max )
(3) +24V 4A(max)

£-1 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. Connectors
Connector Function Pin No.
AFCN1 Power supply. 1. +5V
2. GND(+5V)
3. +24V
4. GND(+24V)
5. +15V
6. GND(+15V)

Connector Function Pin No.


AFCN2 Control of film carrier. 1, 2, 3: Drive cartridge light lock doorsolenoid.
Input. 5, 6, 9, 10: Drive cartridge motor.
APS cartridge-related. 13, 14, 19, 20: +5V
Output. 17, 18, 23, 24: GND.
Cartridge motor. 11, 12: Spare (to detect carrier setting).
Light lock door solenoid. 15: VEI.
16: CTS.
21: CLS.
22: LLDS.

Connector Function Pin No.


AFCN3 Film carrier signals. 1: +15V.
Input. 3, 5. +5V.
Film sensor. 2, 4, 6, 26, 28, 30: GND.
APS IX magnetic data line. 7, 8: FHS.
Carrier type/mask type. 9, 10, 11, 12: RDH**.
Output. 13: LED_DRV.
Carrier LED. 15, 16: SDK/SDA.
17∼23: AN0∼AN6.
25, 27, 29: FCS.
31, 32, 33: PMSOL.
14, 34: NC.

Connector Function Pin No.


AFCN4 Communication with image 1. RxD
capture unit. 2. TxD
3. FRESET
4. FBUSY
5. CLK
6. ENB
7. LCLK
8. GND

£-2 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Connector Function Pin No.
AFCN5 Front-mounted LEDs. 1,2. NC
Control of power to flatbed 3. +24V
scanner outlet. 4. FUN2
5,6. RUN LED
7,8. POWER LED
9,10. SW
11,12. Spare
13,14. AC DRIVE

Connector Function Pin No.


AFCN6 Driving speed change unit 1,3. +24V
control line. 2. CLT1
4. CLT2
5,6 NC
7. MCLK
8. R/LEFT
9. W23P/23P
10,11,12. V0,V1,V2
14. +5V
13,16. GND
15. CHS

Connector Function Pin No.


AFCN8 Imaging illuminant 1∼8. Illuminant.
control line. 9∼12. Illuminant.
13∼16. Illuminant.
19∼29. Illuminant.
7. MCLK
8. R/LEFT
9. 3P/23P
10,11,12. V0,V1,V2
33,35,37,39. +24V
34,36,38,40. FUN
30,31. ANALOG
17. LSS0
18. GND

Connector Function Pin No.


AFCN10 For CPU programs. 1. TxD
3. RxD
7. GND

£-3 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
5. On-board switches
SW Setting
SW1 Function:
[MODE] Sets hardware modes.
DIP switch settings:
Bit No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON/OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Setting details:
Bit No Setting Details/function
Bit 1 OFF
Bit 2 OFF
Bit 3 OFF
Bit 4 OFF
Bit 5 OFF
Bit 6 OFF
Bit 7 OFF

ON For factory use (to enable write to boot ROM).


Bit 8
OFF Must be turned off all the time.

SW2 Function:
[RESET] Pressing this switch resets CPU.

6. On-board test pins


TP Silk Terminal
TP1 [GND] GND terminal.
TP35,36,37,38,39
TP2 [5V] +5V check terminal.
TP3 [24V] +24V check terminal.
TP4 [15V] +15V check terminal.
TP5 [3.3V] +3.3V check terminal.
TP6 [2.5V] +2.5V check terminal.

£-4 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7. On-board LEDs
LED Silk What it indicates
LED1 [CNFG] Status of initialization of FPGA.
Lit : Initialization is complete.
LED2 [BUSY] Status of operation of FPGA.
Lit : FPGA is operating (feeding film).
LED3 Setting of driving speed change unit.
Lit : Unit is set.
LED4 Status of imaging unit.
Lit : Unit is operating.
LED6 [POWER] Lights when CPU starts operation.
Lit : Software is running.
LED7 [RUN] Status of film.
Unlit : No film is loaded.
Lit : Film is loaded.
Blinking : Film is being fed.
LED8∼LED15 Indicate modes.
LED16 [B1] B illuminant drive IC46 is open.
Lit : An error condition exists.
LED17 [B2] B illuminant drive IC46 temperature is beyond limit.
Lit : An error condition exists.
LED18 [B3] B illuminant drive IC47 is open.
Lit : An error condition exists.
LED19 [B4] B illuminant drive IC47 temperature is beyond limit.
Lit : An error condition exists.
LED20 [B5] B illuminant drive IC48 is open.
Lit : An error condition exists.
LED21 [B6] B illuminant drive IC48 temperature is beyond limit.
Lit : An error condition exists.
LED22 [G1] G illuminant drive IC9 is open.
Lit : An error condition exists.
LED23 [G2] G illuminant drive IC9 temperature is beyond limit.
Lit : An error condition exists.
LED24 [G3] G illuminant drive IC10 is open.
Lit : An error condition exists.
LED25 [G4] G illuminant drive IC10 temperature is beyond limit.
Lit : An error condition exists.
LED26 [R1] R illuminant drive IC11 is open.
Lit : An error condition exists.
LED27 [R2] R illuminant drive IC11 temperature is beyond limit.
Lit : An error condition exists.
LED28 [IR1] IR illuminant drive IC12 is open.
Lit : An error condition exists.
LED29 [IR2] IR illuminant drive IC12 temperature is beyond limit.
Lit : An error condition exists.

£-5 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
8. On-board potentiometers
LED Silk Function
VR1,VR2,VR3 [B1] [B2] [B3] Adjust the blue LEDs.
VR4,VR5 [G1] [G2] Adjust the current through the green LEDs.
VR6 [R] Adjusts the current through the red LEDs.
VR7 [IR] Adjusts the current through the IR LEDs.
Note: VR1~VR7 are factory-adjusted. Do not tamper with them in the field.

£-6 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-2. DC-TRM board (2700H1140)

1. What it does

Supply DC power to Image capturing unit, AFC-CPU board, transport motors and light source of
DS-1000.

2. External view and functions

(1) External view

(2) Dimensions
90 x 155 x around 30 mm (with four mounting holes)

3. Supplied power
(1) +5V 2A(max )
(2) +15V 0.4 A(max )
(3) +24V 4A(max)

£-7 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. Connectors
Connector Function Pin No.
FCN1 Power (Input) 1. +15V
7. AGND(+15V)
2, 3. +5V
8,9. GND(+5V)
4, 5,6 +24V.
10.,11,12. PGND(+24V)

Connector Function Pin No.


FCN2 Power supply to image 1. +15V
capturing unit 4. AGND(+15V)
2. +5V
5. GND(+5V)
3. +24V.
6. PGND(+24V)

Connector Function Pin No..


FCN3 Power supply to AFC-CPU 1. +15V
board 5. AGND(+15V)
2. +5V
6. GND(+5V)
3,4. +24V.
7,8. PGND(+24V)

Connector Function Pin No..


FCN4 Power supply to transport 1. +5V
motor 2. GND(+5V)
3,4. +24V.
5,6. PGND(+24V)

Connector Function Pin No.


FCN5 Not used

Connector Function Pin No.


FCN6 Not used

£-8 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
5. On-board test pins
TP Silk Terminal
TP1 [+15V] +15V check terminal
TP2 [AGND] AGND
TP3 [+5V] +5V check terminal
TP4 [GND] GND
TP5 [+24V] +24V check terminal
TP6、TP14 [PG] PG
TP7 [G1] G1 LED light source current adjustment terminal
TP8 [G2] G2 LED light source current adjustment terminal
TP9 [R] R LED light source current adjustment terminal
TP10 [IR1] IR1 light source current adjustment terminal
TP11 [IR2] IR2 light source current adjustment terminal
TP12 [B1] B1 light source current adjustment terminal
TP13 [B2] B2 LED light source current adjustment terminal
TP15 [24V1] Image capturing unit power supply check terminal
TP16 [24V2] AFC-CPU board power supply check terminal
TP17 [24V3] scanner driver board power supply check terminal
TP18 +24V check terminal

6. On-board VRs
LED Silk Function
VR1,VR2 [G1] [G2] Green LED light source current adjustment terminal
VR3 [R] Red LED light source current adjustment terminal
VR4,VR5 [B1] [B2] Blue LED light source current adjustment terminal
Note: VR1 through VR5 are set in factory. Do not touch VR in field.

£-9 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-3. SCANNER DRIVING board (56GA-9090-00)

1. What it does

Drive and control 3 phase stepping motor

2. External view and functions

(1) External view

(2) Dimensions
94 x 17 x around 45 mm (with four mounting holes)

3. Supplied power
(1) +5V 1A(max )
(2) +24V 4A(max)

£-10 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. Connectors
Connector Function Pin No..
CN600 Power supply (input) 1. +5V
2. GND
3、4. +24V
5、6. PG

Connector Function Pin No.


CN610 Motor control signal 1. MCLK
2. MA/*LEFT
3. W23P/*23P
4. V0
5. V1
6. V2
7∼15. not used

Note: CN621, CN622 and CN623 are not used.

5. On-board test pins


TP Silk Terminal
TP1 [SGND] SGND
TP2 [5V] +5V check terminal
TP3 [PGND] PGND
TP4 [24V] +24V check terminal
Note: There are any real test pins on board.

£-11 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-4. LS-LED-A board (2700H1100)

1. What it does

Light source for image capturing unit (Blue light)

2. External view and functions

(1)External view

(2) Dimensions
118 x 50 x around 15 mm (with four mounting holes)

(3) Functions
Light source for image capturing unit (Blue light)

3. Connectors
Connector Function Pin No.
LSCN1 LED light source for image 1. V_B1
capturing unit 2. B-CH11
3. B-CH10
4. B-CH9
5. B-CH8
6. B-CH7
7. B-CH6
8. B-CH5
9. B-CH4
10. B-CH3
11. B-CH2
12. B-CH1
13. V_B2
14. +5V
15. LS-TH
16. N.C

£-12 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-5. LS-LED-B board (2700H1110)

1. What it does

Light source for image capturing unit (G, R and IR light))

2. External view and functions

(1)External view

(2) Dimensions
118 x 50 x around 15 mm (with four mounting holes)

(3) Functions
Light source for image capturing unit (Green)
Light source for image capturing unit (Red)
Light source for image capturing unit (IR)

£-13 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3. Connectors
Connector Function Pin No.
LSCN2 LED light source for image 1. V_G1
capturing unit 2. G-CH1
3. G-CH2
4. G-CH3
5. G-CH4
6. G-CH5
7. G-CH6
8. G-CH7
9. G-CH8
10. V_G2
11. V_R1
12. R-CH1
13. R-CH2
14. R-CH3
15. R-CH4
16. V_R2
17. V_IR1
18. IR-CH1
19. IR-CH2
20. IR-CH3
21. IR-CH4
22. V_IR2
23. through_out
24. through out
25. N.C
26. N.C

£-14 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-6. 135LED board (2700H1340)

1. What it does

Illuminate LED of sensor.


Used in 135 AFC.

2. External view and functions

(1)External view

(2) Dimensions
162 x 85 and around 15 mm (with three mounting holes)
There is a notch.

(3) Functions
For film sensor LED
Relay full/panoramic mask solenoid cable

£-15 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3. Connectors
Connector Function Pin No.
CCN4 1. +5V
2. +5V
3. *LED_DRV
4. *LED_DRV
5. PMSOL+
6. PMSOL+
7. PMSOL_C
8. PMSOL_C
9. PMSOL-
10. PMSOL-

Connector Function Pin No.


CCN8 1. PMSOL+
2. PMSOL_C
3. PMSOL-

£-16 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-7. SENS-A board (2700H1320)

1. What it does

Film detection board.


Sensor board which has photo diode.

2. External view and functions

(1)External view

(2) Dimensions
27.5 x 6 x around 10 mm (with a mounting hole)

(3) Functions
135AFC: a) Inlet film insertion detection x 1 CH, b) Film perforation detection x 2 CH
240AFC: a) Inlet film insertion detection x 1 CH, b) Film perforation detection x 2 CH

3. Connectors
Connector Function Pin No.
CCN1 Photo diode 1. PD-A
2. PD-K

£-17 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-8. SENS-B board (2700H1330)

1. What it does

Film latent image barcode detection board.


Sensor board which has photo diode.

2. External view and functions

(1)External view

(2) Dimensions
28 x 10 x around 10 mm (with a mounting hole)

(3) Functions
135AFC: Code detection x 2 CH
240AFC: Code detection x 2 CH

3. Connectors
Connector Function Pin No..
CCN2 Photo diode 1. PD-
2. PD-
3. CATHODE

£-18 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-9. 240LED board (2700H1380)

1. What it does

Illuminate LED of sensor.


Used in 240 AFC.

2. External view and functions

(1)External view

(2) Dimensions
140 x 88 x around 15 mm (with three mounting holes)
with a notch

(3) Functions
For film sensor light source LED

3. Connector
Connector Function Pin No.
CCN5 1. +5V
2. +5V
3. *LED-DRV
4. *LED-DRV
5. PMSOL+
6. PMSOL+
7. PMSOL_C
8. PMSOL_C
9. PMSOL-
10. PMSOL-

£-19 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-10. MAG-AMP board (2700H1390)

1. What it does

For 240AFC
Amp. board for APS film Magnetic data

2. External view and functions

(1)External view

(2) Dimensions
117 x 70 x around 23mm (with three mounting holes)
with a notch

(3) Functions
APS film magnetic head output: 4 CH

£-20 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3. Connectors
Connector Function Pin No.
MACN1 1. +12V
2. GND
3. -12V
4. RDH11
5. RDH12
6. RDH21
7. RDH22

Connector Function Pin No.


MACN2 1. GND
2. GND
3. TRACK12-
4. TRACK12+
5. GND
6. TRACK11-
7. TRACK11+
8. GND

Connector Function Pin No.


MACN3 1. GND
2. TRACK21+
3. TRACK21-
4. GND
5. TRACK22+
6. TRACK22-
7. GND
8. GND

Connector Function Pin No.


MACN4 1. T1
2. GND
3. T2
4. GND

Connector Function Pin No.


MACN5 1. T3
2. GND
3. T4
4. GND

£-21 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-11. PD-AMP board (2700H1300)

1. What it does

Amp. board for film sensors (inlet detection, latent image bar cord detection and perforation
detection)
For both 135AFC and 240AFC

2. External view and functions

(1) External view

(2) Dimensions
150 x 50 x around 10 mm (with two mounting holes)
with a notch

(3) Functions
Film sensor amp.: 7 CH
Carrier ID setting: 2 CH
Relay of cable for 135LED and 240LED board (Sensor LED drive, full/panoramic solenoid)
Power supply and cable relay for 240AFC MAG AMP board

£-22 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3. Connectors
Connector Function Pin No.
PDCN1 1. PMSOL_C
2. PMSOL-
3. PMSOL+
4. FCS1
5. GND(FCS0)
6. FCS0
7. NHS
8. SENSOR6
9. SENSOR5
10. SENSOR4
11. SENSOR3
12. SENSOR2
13. SENSOR1
14. SENSOR0
15. SDA
16. SCK
17. NC
18. LEDDRV
19. M_D22
20. M_D12
21. M_D21
22. M_D11
23. FHS1
24. FHS0
25. GND
26. +5V
27. GND
28. +5V
29. GND
30. +15V

Connector Function Pin No.


PDCN2 1. +5V
2. +5V
3. LEDDRV
4. LEDDRV
5. PMSOL+
6. PMSOL+
7. PMSOL_C
8. PMSOL_C
9. PMSOL-
10. PMSOL-

£-23 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Connector Function Pin No.
PDCN3 1. IN
2. GND
3. ROCS
4. RICS
5. GND
6. UPRS
7. N.C
8. GND
9. LOCS
10. LICS
11. GND
12. GND

Connector Function Pin No.


PDCN4 1. LPRS
2. N.C
3. GND

Connector Function Pin No.


PDCN5 1. +5V
2. NHS
3. GND
4. N.C

Connector Function Pin No.


PDCN6 1. +12V
2. GND
3. -12V
4. M_D11
5. M_D12
6. M_D21
7. M_D22

£-24 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. On-board switches
SW Setting
SW1 Function
[MODE] Set carrier ID.
In case of multiple film carrier set different ID to each carrier.
Dip SW setting
Bit No 1 2
ON/OFF OFF OFF

Setting donditoin

Bit No Setting 1 Setting 2 Setting 3 Setting 4


Bit 1 OFF ON OFF ON
Bit 2 OFF OFF ON ON

4 pattern selection. Default: Setting 1

5. On-board test pins


TP Silk Terminal
TP1 [+5V] +5V check terminal
TP2 [-15V] -15V check terminal
TP3 [GND] GND termin
TP4 [-5V] -5V check terminal
TP5 [-12V] -12V check terminal
TP6 [IN] IN sensor check terminal
TP7 [ROCS] ROCS sensor check terminal
TP8 [RICS] RICS sensor check terminal
TP9 [UPRS] UPRS sensor check terminal
TP10 [LOC] LOC sensor check terminal
TP11 [LIC] LIC sensor check terminal
TP12 [LPR] LPR sensor check terminal
TP13 SENSOR0 output voltage terminal
TP14 SENSOR1 output voltage terminal
TP15 SENSOR2 output voltage terminal
TP16 SENSOR3 output voltage terminal
TP17 SENSOR4 output voltage terminal
TP18 SENSOR5 output voltage terminal
TP19 SENSOR6 output voltage terminal
TP20 [+12V] +12V check terminal

£-25 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-12. FMS board (2700H1370)

1. What it does

Sensor board to detect Universal film carrier mask

2. External view and functions

(1)External view

(2) Dimensions
36 x 27 x around 10 mm (with two mounting holes)
with a notch

(3) Functions
Mask detection: 3 CH
Carrier setting: 2 CH

3. Connector

Connector Function Pin No.


CCN7 Photo interrupter signal 1. +5V
2. GND
3. MS2
4. MS1
5. MS0
6. AN0
7. AN1
8. GND

£-26 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. On-board switches
SW Setting
SW1 Function
[MODE] Select universal carrier ID.
If there are number of UFC, change settings for each carrier.
Default dip switch setting
Bit No 1 2
ON/OFF OFF OFF

Setting

Bit No Setting 1 Setting 2 Setting 3 Setting 4


Bit 1 OFF ON OFF ON
Bit 2 OFF OFF ON ON

4 selections.
Default: 1

£-27 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-13. LED-LAMP board (2700H1360)

1. What it does

For universal carrier LED control

2. External view and functions

(1)External view

(2) Dimensions
83 x 10 x around 10 mm (with two mounting holes)

(3) Functions
LED light: 1 CH

3. Connector

Connector Function Pin No..


CCN6 LED light control 1. +15V
2. LEDDRV

£-28 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
■Printer

3-14. HDC-PCI Circuit Board (2710H1000)

1. What it does

This forms part of the exposure engine as the PCI circuit board mounted in the PCI slot of the
printer PC. It stores PC-processed two-dimensional image data temporarily, and sends the data to
the HEAD-BUFF circuit board at the optimal times for the head positions and mounting as
described further on in this paper.

2. External view and functions

(1) External view.

(2) Dimensions.
106.68mm x 220mm x about 12mm (PCI circuit board).

(3) Functions.
FPGA: EP20K200EFC484-1X (Altera).
FPGA: EPF10K50SQC240-1 (Altera).
SDRAM: HY57V281620AT-P (Hyundai)×6.
EEPROM: AT93C46-10SC-2.7 (Atmel).

3. Power supplies
(1) +5V
(2) +3.3V

£-29 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. Connectors

4-1.HEAD-BUFF Circuit Board…interface specifications (MCN1)


1) Connector catalog No.: Half-pitch 68-pin connector FCN-235D068-G/C (Fujitsu).
2) Signal level: Differential (+/-) and 3.3V CMOS level.
3) Pin assignment: See below.
Function Label Pin Label Function
Data bus D0 (LSB) + +RH_D[0] 1 35 -RH_D[0] Data bus D0 (LSB) -
Data bus D1 + +RH_D[1] 2 36 -RH_D[1] Data bus D1 -
Data bus D2 + +RH_D[2] 3 37 -RH_D[2] Data bus D2 -
Data bus D3 + +RH_D[3] 4 38 -RH_D[3] Data bus D3 -
Data bus D4 + +RH_D[4] 5 39 -RH_D[4] Data bus D4 -
Data bus D5 + +RH_D[5] 6 40 -RH_D[5] Data bus D5 -
Data bus D6 + +RH_D[6] 7 41 -RH_D[6] Data bus D6 -
Data bus D7 + +RH_D[7] 8 42 -RH_D[7] Data bus D7 -
Data bus D8 + +RH_D[8] 9 43 -RH_D[8] Data bus D8 -
Data bus D9 + +RH_D[9] 10 44 -RH_D[9] Data bus D9 -
Data bus D10 + +RH_D[10] 11 45 -RH_D[10] Data bus D10 -
Data bus D11 + +RH_D[11] 12 46 -RH_D[11] Data bus D11 -
Data bus D12 + +RH_D[12] 13 47 -RH_D[12] Data bus D12 -
Data bus D13 + +RH_D[13] 14 48 -RH_D[13] Data bus D13 -
Data bus D14 + +RH_D[14] 15 49 -RH_D[14] Data bus D14 -
Data bus D15 + +RH_D[15] 16 50 RH_D[15] Data bus D15 -
Ground GND 17 51 GND Ground
Dot clock 4.17MHz + +RH_DOTS_CLK 18 52 -RH_DOTS_CLK Dot clock 4.17MHz -
Pixel data clock 25MHz + +RH_PCLK 19 53 -RH_PCLK Pixel data clock 25MHz -
Interrupt request + +RH_INT_REQ 20 54 -RH_INT_REQ Interrupt request -
Ready + +RH_RDY 21 55 -RH_RDY Ready -
Data strobe + +RH_DSTB 22 56 -RH_DSTB Data strobe -
Address strobe + +RH_ASTB 23 57 -RH_ASTB Address strobe -
Read/write select + +RH_RW 24 58 -RH_RW Read/write select -
Access mode(print/reg.) + +RH_BUS_MODE 25 59 -RH_BUS_MODE Access mode(print/reg.) -
Ground GND 26 60 RH_INT_RQ2 FPGA connect (same for RGB))
Ground GND 27 61 SPEAR IN2 FPGA connect (same for RGB)
Ground GND 28 62 Ready FPGA connect (same for RGB)
Ground (BL1_SYNC return) GND 29 63 BL1_SYNC Head 1 blue line sync clock
Ground (GL1_SYNC return) GND 30 64 GL1_SYNC Head 1 green line sync clock
Ground (RL1_SYNC return) GND 31 65 RL1_SYNC Head 1 red line sync clock
Ground (BL2_SYNC return) GND 32 66 BL2_SYNC Head 2 blue line sync clock
Ground (GL2_SYNC return) GND 33 67 GL2_SYNC Head 2 green line sync clock
Ground (RL2_SYNC return) GND 34 68 RL2_SYNC Head 2 red line sync clock

£-30 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4-2. Downloads…interface (for connection with flash ROM EPC2) (MCN2)
1) Connector catalog No.: 5547-10A (Molex).
2) Pin assignment: See below.
Pin No. Signal name I/O Function
1 TCK I JTAG clock pin (pulls down to GND through 1kΩ).
2 GND −
3 TDO O JTAG data output pin (pulls up to 3.3V through 1kΩ).
4 VCC3.3V −
5 TMS JTAG mode select pin (pulls up to 3.3V through 1kΩ).
6 VCC3.3V −
7 N.C. −
8 N.C. −
9 TDI I JTAG data input pin (pulls up to 3.3V through 1kΩ).
10 GND −

5. On-board switches
SW Setting
SW1 Function:
[MODE] Sets hardware modes.
DIP switch settings:
Bit No 1 2 3 4
ON/OFF ON OFF ON ON

Setting details:
Bit No Setting Details/Function
Bit 1 OFF Spare pin
Bit 2 OFF Spare pin
Bit 3 OFF Spare pin
Bit 4 OFF Spare pin

6. On-board test pins


TP Silk Terminal
TP10、TP11 [GND] GND 端子
TP12 [1.8V] +1.8V check terminal.
TP13 [2.5V] +2.5V check terminal.
TP14 [VCC] +3.3V check terminal.
Note: All the test pins still have to be installed.

£-31 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-15. HEAD-BUFF Circuit Board (2710H1010)

1. What it does

Holds one line of the image received from the HDC-PCI Circuit Board, and turns on and off the
exposure heads;
Corrects the differences in sensitivity between pixels (pixel non-uniformity correction); and Corrects
gamma.

2. External view and functions

(1) External view.

(2) Dimensions.
270mm x 170mm x about 10 mm (with six mounting holes).

(3) Functions.
FPGA: EP20K200EFC484-2X (Altera) x 3.
SRAM: IS61LV6416-15T(ISSI) x 6.
EEPROM: AT93C46-10SC-2.7 (Atmel).

3. Power supplies
(1) +5V、2A(MAX)

£-32 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. Connectors

4-1. HDC-PCI Circuit Board…interface specifications (HBCN1)


1) Connector catalog No.: Half-pitch 68-pin connector 79059 (Molex).
2) Signal level: Differential (+/-) and 3.3V CMOS level.
3) Pin assignment: See below.
Function Label Pin Label Function
Data bus D0 (LSB) + +RH_D[0] 1 35 -RH_D[0] Data bus D0 (LSB) -
Data bus D1 + +RH_D[1] 2 36 -RH_D[1] Data bus D1 -
Data bus D2 + +RH_D[2] 3 37 -RH_D[2] Data bus D2 -
Data bus D3 + +RH_D[3] 4 38 -RH_D[3] Data bus D3 -
Data bus D4 + +RH_D[4] 5 39 -RH_D[4] Data bus D4 -
Data bus D5 + +RH_D[5] 6 40 -RH_D[5] Data bus D5 -
Data bus D6 + +RH_D[6] 7 41 -RH_D[6] Data bus D6 -
Data bus D7 + +RH_D[7] 8 42 -RH_D[7] Data bus D7 -
Data bus D8 + +RH_D[8] 9 43 -RH_D[8] Data bus D8 -
Data bus D9 + +RH_D[9] 10 44 -RH_D[9] Data bus D9 -
Data bus D10 + +RH_D[10] 11 45 -RH_D[10] Data bus D10 -
Data bus D11 + +RH_D[11] 12 46 -RH_D[11] Data bus D11 -
Data bus D12 + +RH_D[12] 13 47 -RH_D[12] Data bus D12 -
Data bus D13 + +RH_D[13] 14 48 -RH_D[13] Data bus D13 -
Data bus D14 + +RH_D[14] 15 49 -RH_D[14] Data bus D14 -
Data bus D15 + +RH_D[15] 16 50 RH_D[15] Data bus D15 -
Ground GND 17 51 GND Ground
Dot clock 4.17MHz + +RH_DOTS_CLK 18 52 -RH_DOTS_CLK Dot clock 4.17MHz -
Pixel data clock 25MHz + +RH_PCLK 19 53 -RH_PCLK Pixel data clock 25MHz -
Interrupt request + +RH_INT_REQ 20 54 -RH_INT_REQ Interrupt request -
Ready + +RH_RDY 21 55 -RH_RDY Ready -
Data strobe + +RH_DSTB 22 56 -RH_DSTB Data strobe -
Address strobe + +RH_ASTB 23 57 -RH_ASTB Address strobe -
Read/write select + +RH_RW 24 58 -RH_RW Read/write select -
Access mode(print/reg.) + +RH_BUS_MODE 25 59 -RH_BUS_MODE Access mode(print/reg.) -
Ground GND 26 60 RH_INT_RQ2 FPGA connect (same for RGB)
Ground GND 27 61 SPEAR IN2 FPGA connect (same for RGB)
Ground GND 28 62 Ready FPGA connect (same for RGB)
Ground (BL1_SYNC return) GND 29 63 BL1_SYNC Head 1 blue line sync clock
Ground (GL1_SYNC return) GND 30 64 GL1_SYNC Head 1 green line sync clock
Ground (RL1_SYNC return) GND 31 65 RL1_SYNC Head 1 red line sync clock
Ground (BL2_SYNC return) GND 32 66 BL2_SYNC Head 2 blue line sync clock
Ground (GL2_SYNC return) GND 33 67 GL2_SYNC Head 2 green line sync clock
Ground (RL2_SYNC return) GND 34 68 RL2_SYNC Head 2 red line sync clock

£-33 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4-2. HEAD-BUFF1 Circuit Board…interface specifications (HBCN2)
1) Connector catalog No.: Half-pitch 68-pin connector 79059 (Molex).
2) Signal level: Differential (+/-) and 3.3V CMOS level.
3) Pin assignment Δ4: See below.
Function Label Pin Label Function
Data bus D0 (LSB) + +RH_D[0] 1 35 -RH_D[0] Data bus D0 (LSB) -
Data bus D1 + +RH_D[1] 2 36 -RH_D[1] Data bus D1 -
Data bus D2 + +RH_D[2] 3 37 -RH_D[2] Data bus D2 -
Data bus D3 + +RH_D[3] 4 38 -RH_D[3] Data bus D3 -
Data bus D4 + +RH_D[4] 5 39 -RH_D[4] Data bus D4 -
Data bus D5 + +RH_D[5] 6 40 -RH_D[5] Data bus D5 -
Data bus D6 + +RH_D[6] 7 41 -RH_D[6] Data bus D6 -
Data bus D7 + +RH_D[7] 8 42 -RH_D[7] Data bus D7 -
Data bus D8 + +RH_D[8] 9 43 -RH_D[8] Data bus D8 -
Data bus D9 + +RH_D[9] 10 44 -RH_D[9] Data bus D9 -
Data bus D10 + +RH_D[10] 11 45 -RH_D[10] Data bus D10 -
Data bus D11 + +RH_D[11] 12 46 -RH_D[11] Data bus D11 -
Data bus D12 + +RH_D[12] 13 47 -RH_D[12] Data bus D12 -
Data bus D13 + +RH_D[13] 14 48 -RH_D[13] Data bus D13 -
Data bus D14 + +RH_D[14] 15 49 -RH_D[14] Data bus D14 -
Data bus D15 + +RH_D[15] 16 50 RH_D[15] Data bus D15 -
Ground GND 17 51 GND Ground
Dot clock 4.17MHz + +RH_DOTS_CLK 18 52 -RH_DOTS_CLK Dot clock 4.17MHz -
Pixel data clock 25MHz + +RH_PCLK 19 53 -RH_PCLK Pixel data clock 25MHz -
Interrupt request + +RH_INT_REQ 20 54 -RH_INT_REQ Interrupt request -
Ready + +RH_RDY 21 55 -RH_RDY Ready -
Data strobe + +RH_DSTB 22 56 -RH_DSTB Data strobe -
Address strobe + +RH_ASTB 23 57 -RH_ASTB Address strobe -
Read/write select + +RH_RW 24 58 -RH_RW Read/write select -
Access mode(print/reg.) + +RH_BUS_MODE 25 59 -RH_BUS_MODE Access mode(print/reg.) -
Ground GND 26 60 RH_INT_RQ2 FPGA connect (same for RGB)
Ground GND 27 61 SPEAR IN2 FPGA connect (same for RGB)
Ground GND 28 62 Ready FPGA connect (same for RGB)
Ground (BL1_SYNC return) GND 29 63 BL1_SYNC Head 1 blue line sync clock
Ground (GL1_SYNC return) GND 30 64 GL1_SYNC Head 1 green line sync clock
Ground (RL1_SYNC return) GND 31 65 RL1_SYNC Head 1 red line sync clock
Ground (BL2_SYNC return) GND 32 66 BL2_SYNC Head 2 blue line sync clock
Ground (GL2_SYNC return) GND 33 67 GL2_SYNC Head 2 green line sync clock
Ground (RL2_SYNC return) GND 34 68 RL2_SYNC Head 2 red line sync clock

£-34 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4-3. R-MTCL Circuit Board…interface specifications (HBCN3)
1) Connector catalog No.: Angle connector for flat cable (2.54 pitch) (PS-30PE-D4LT (JEL) or
equivalent).
・ Signal interface input: Use Schmidt buffer (74HC14, etc.) for connection.
・ Signal interface output Δ5: TTL open collector output (pulled up to 5V through 10kΩ on this
circuit board).
2) Pin assignment: See below.

Pin No. Signal name I/O Description Signal level


1 START I Start-of-exposure signal. 5V
2 BCARRY1 I Block 1 Carry B synchronizing signal. 5V
3 GCARRY1 I Block 1 Carry G synchronizing signal. 5V
4 RCARRY1 I Block 1 Carry R synchronizing signal. 5V
5 FLASH I Head flash signal (H: Flash, L: Stop). 5V
6 PTIFLASH I Head petty flash signal (H: Flash, L: Stop). 5V
7 GND
8 GND
9 READY O Ready signal to MC (H: Ready, L: Busy). 5V
10 RESETM I Reset signal from MC. 5V
11 BSTART1 I B head start-of-exposure signal. 5V
12 GSTART1 I G head start-of-exposure signal. 5V
13 RSTART1 I R head start-of-exposure signal. 5V
14 FB_START I Start of light measuring (L: Start, H: End). 5V
15 FB_READY O Feedback control ready signal (H: Ready, L: Busy). 5V
16 FB_B_CH I B feedback send/light cycle signal (L: Send/light). 5V
17 GND
18 GND
19 FB_G_CH I G feedback send/light cycle signal (L: Send/light). 5V
20 FB_R_CH I R feedback send/light cycle signal (L: Send/light). 5V
21 CH_STS0 O Send/emit signal 0. 5V
22 CH_STS1 O Send/emit signal 0. 5V
23 PWR_B I Power to B head (H: On, L: Off). 5V
24 PWR_G I Power to G head (H: On, L: Off). 5V
25 STD_SENS I Exposure reference sensor signal (from MC). 5V
26 LED_ON O Power to LED heads (to MC) (L: On, H: Off). 5V
27 B_SEL_IN I B Ef/Ecc voltage select signal (H: Normal, L: Low). 5V
28 G_SEL_IN I G Ef/Ecc voltage select signal (H: Normal, L: Low). 5V
29 GND
30 GND

£-35 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4-4. Heads…interface specifications (HBCN4)
1) Connector catalog No.: FCN-245D080-G/E (Fujitsu) or equivalent.
2) Signal level: 5V TTL. 3) Pin assignment 1: See below.
Pin No. Signal name I/O Description Signal level
1 B_DO3 O Data ODD3 (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
2 B_DO7 O Data ODD7 (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
3 B_DO2 O Data ODD2 (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
4 B_DO6 O Data ODD6 (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
5 B_DO1 O Data ODD1 (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
6 B_DO5 O Data ODD5 (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
7 B_DO0 O Data ODD0 (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
8 B_DO4 O Data ODD4 (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
9 GND
10 GND
11 B_DE3 O Data EVEN3 (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
12 B_DE7 O Data EVEN7 (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
13 B_DE2 O Data EVEN2 (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
14 B_DE6 O Data EVEN6 (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
15 B_DE1 O Data EVEN1 (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
16 B_DE5 O Data EVEN5 (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
17 B_DE0 O Data EVEN0 (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
18 B_DE4 O Data EVEN4 (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
19 GND
20 GND
21 B_BS O H: 16-bit access, L: 8-bit access (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
22 B_OC O Data strobe signal (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
23 B_DST O Data load signal (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
24 GND
25 B_SCK O Head clock signal (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
26 GND
27 G_DO3 O Data ODD3 (G VFPH signal). 3.3V
28 G_DO7 O Data ODD7 (G VFPH signal). 3.3V
29 G_DO2 O Data ODD2 (G VFPH signal). 3.3V
30 G_DO6 O Data ODD6 (G VFPH signal). 3.3V
31 G_DO1 O Data ODD1 (G VFPH signal). 3.3V
32 G_DO5 O Data ODD5 (G VFPH signal). 3.3V
33 G_DO0 O Data ODD0 (G VFPH signal). 3.3V
34 G_DO4 O Data ODD4 (G VFPH signal). 3.3V
35 GND
36 GND
37 G_DE3 O Data EVEN3 (G VFPH signal). 3.3V
38 G_DE7 O Data EVEN7 (G VFPH signal). 3.3V
39 G_DE2 O Data EVEN2 (G VFPH signal). 3.3V
40 G_DE6 O Data EVEN6 (G VFPH signal). 3.3V
41 G_DE1 O Data EVEN1 (G VFPH signal). 3.3V
42 G_DE5 O Data EVEN5 (G VFPH signal). 3.3V
43 G_DE0 O Data EVEN0 (G VFPH signal). 3.3V
44 G_DE4 O Data EVEN4 (G VFPH signal). 3.3V

£-36 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4) Pin assignment 2: See below.
Pin No. Signal name I/O Description Signal level
45 GND
46 GND
47 G_BS O H:16-bit access, L: 8-bit access (G VFPH signal). 3.3V
48 G_OC O Data strobe signal (G VFPH signal). 3.3V
49 G_DST O Data load signal (B VFPH signal). 3.3V
50 GND
51 G_SCK O Head clock signal (G VFPH signal). 3.3V
52 GND
53 GND
54 R_DATA7 O Data 7 (R LED signal). 3.3V
55 R_CS O R EEPROM chip select signal. 3.3V
56 R_DATA8 O Data 8 (R LED signal). 3.3V
57 R_SO I R EEPROM serial data input signal. 3.3V
58 R_DATA5 O Data 5 (R LED signal). 3.3V
59 R_SCK O R EEPROM clock signal. 3.3V
60 R_DATA6 O Data 6 (R LED signal). 3.3V
61 R_SI O EEPROM serial data output signal. 3.3V
62 GND
63 GND
64 R_DATA3 Data 3 (R LED signal). 3.3V
65 R_STRB O Data strobe signal (R LED signal). 3.3V
66 R_DATA4 O Data 4 (R LED signal). 3.3V
67 R_LOAD O Data load signal (R LED signal). 3.3V
68 R_DATA1 O Data 1 (R LED signal). 3.3V
69 R_CLK O Head clock signal (R LED signal). 3.3V
70 R_DATA2 O Data 2 (R LED signal). 3.3V
71 GND
72 GND
73 ROM_CS O Exposure Unit EEPROM chip select signal. 5V
74 ROM_SCK O Exposure Unit EEPROM clock signal. 5V
75 ROM_SI O Exposure Unit EEPROM data output signal. 5V
76 ROM_SO I Exposure Unit EEPROM data input signal. 5V
77 BG-CONT O BG Ef/Ecc/Ebb output control (H: Output, L: Stop) (initially set to L). Note 1)
78 BG-SEL O BGEf/Ecc voltage select signal H: Low, L: Normal) (initially set to L).
79 GND
80 GND

£-37 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4-5. Power…interface (HBCN5)
1) Connector catalog No.: 3.96-/7.92-pitch, right angle 5278-NA (Molex).
2) Pin assignment: See below.
Pin No. Signal name Description
1 Vcc 5V input power.
2 Vcc 5V input power.
3 Vcc 5V input power.
4 GND
5 GND
6 GND

4-6. Downloads…interface (for connection with Flash ROM EPC2) (HBCN6)


1) Connector catalog No.: 5547-10A (Molex).
2) Pin assignment: See below.
Pin No. Signal name I/O Description
1 TCK I JTAG clock signal (pulled down to GND through 1kΩ). △3
2 GND −
3 TDO O JTAG data output pin (pulled up to 3.3V through 1kΩ).
4 VCC3.3V −
5 TMS JTAG mode select pin (pulled up to 3.3Vthrough 1kΩ).
6 VCC3.3V −
7 N.C. −
8 N.C. −
9 TDI I JTAG data input pin (pulled up to 3.3V through 1kΩ).
10 GND −

4-7. Power to heads…interface (HBCN7) Δ5


1) Connector catalog No.: 2.5mm-pitch right angle (5046-10A).
2) Signal level: TTL open collector output (pulled up to 5V through 10kΩon this circuit board).
3) Pin assignment: See below.

Pin No. Signal name I/O Description


1 B_CONT O B Ef/Ecc/Ebb output control (H: Output, L: Stop). H
2 GND
3 B_SEL O B Ef/Ecc voltage select signal (H: Normal, L: Low). H
4 GND
5 G_CONT O G Ef/Ecc/Ebb output control (H: Output, L: Stop). H
6 GND
7 G_SEL O G Ef/Ecc voltage select signal (H: Normal, L: Low). H
8 GND
9 RES1
10 GND

£-38 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4-8. Downloads…interface (for direct connection with PC) (HBCN8)
1) Connector catalog No.: 5547-10A (Molex).
2) Pin assignment: See below.
Pin No. Signal name I/O Description
1 TCK I JTAG clock pin (pulled down to GND through 1kΩ)
2 GND −
3 TDO O JTAG data output pin
4 VCC3.3V −
5 TMS J JTAG mode select pin (pulled up to 3.3V through 1kΩ)
6 VCC3.3V −
7 N.C. −
8 N.C. −
9 TDI I JTAG data input pin (pulled up to 3.3V through 1kΩ)
10 GND −

4-9. Boundary scans…interface (for connection with Flash ROM EPC2) (HBCN9)
1) Connector catalog No.: 5547-10A (Molex).
2) Pin assignment: See below.
Pin No. Signal name I/O Description
1 TRST I JTAG reset input (pulled up to 3.3V through 10kΩ)
→connected to all 20k resistors (TRST…D12).
2 GND −
3 TDO O JTAG data output pin (connected via 22Ω damper resistor)
→to 20k resistor in the final step (TDO…E11).
4 GND −
5 TDI I JTAG data output pin (pulled up to 3.3Vthrough 10kΩ) Note 1)
→connected to 20k resistor in the 1st step (TDI…M5).
6 GND −
7 TMS I JTAG mode select pin (pulled up to 3.3V through 10kΩ) Note 1)
→connected to all 20k resistors (TMS…W13).
8 GND −
9 TCK I JTAG clock pin (connected to GND in series with 68Ω and 100pf resistors)
→to all 20k resistors (TCK…W12).
10 GND −
Note: All the resistors still have to be installed.

£-39 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
5. On-board switches
SW Setting
SW1 Function:
[MODE] Sets hardware modes.
DIP switch settings:
Bit No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON/OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Setting details:
Bit No Setting Details/function
Selects HEAD-BUFF CB 1 or 2 for twin heads.
Bit 1 OFF
Off: CB 1, On: CB 2.
Switches test pattern over to LED correction
Bit 2 OFF value, and vice versa (see note).
Bit2 Bit3 LED correction Test pattern
Off Off 0b000 (light) Vertical lines
Off On 0b0111 Horizontal lines
Bit 3 OFF On Off 0b1000 Blinking pixels
On On ob1111 (dark) Red dots in tiers
Selects test pattern mode; On: Test pattern,
Bit 4 OFF
Off: Normal.
Selects VFPH exposure mode. On: Exposure
Bit 5 OFF
in four sections, Off: Exposure in layers.
Selects LED exposure mode. On: exposure in
Bit 6 OFF
two sections, Off: Exposure in layers.
Bypasses correction. On: Bypasses LUT as
Bit 7 OFF
well as pixel non-uniformity correction.
Sets up dummy paper. On: Paper sensor signal
Bit 8 OFF
is forcibly changed into paper-is-found.
Note: When you turn on the power, the LED correction value is selected.
After you turn on the power (for about 3 seconds), the test pattern
used in test patter mode is selected.

6. On-board test pins


TP Silk Terminal
TP1 [VCC] +3.3V check terminal.
TP2 [1.8V] +1.8V check terminal.
TP3 [GND] GND terminal.
TP4 [GND] GND terminal.
Note: All the test pins still have to be installed.

£-40 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-16. PRINTER-CPU Circuit Board (2710H1020)

1. What it does

Controls the mechanical components of the printer.

2. External view and functions

(1) External view.

TP1
TP2

TP6 TP4 TP5 SW2 SW1

(2) Dimensions.
240mm x 120mm x about 30mm (with five mounting holes).

(3) Functions.
CPU: HD64F2339 (25MHz clock).
I/O:
Analog input 8 channels.
Logical input 40 channels.
+5V output 66 channels.
Clock output 7 channels.
Serial bus 1 channel.
Serial communication (RS-232-C) 3 channels.

3. Power supplies
(1) +5V 2A (max )

£-41 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. Connectors
Connector Function Pin No.
PCCN1 Power. 1. 5V-2
2. 5V-1(with on-off control).
3. GND(5V-2)
4. GND(5V-1)

Connector Function Pin No.


PCCN2 Sub-drive unit signals. 1. *SD_CLK
2. *SDA_PD
3. *SDA_EN
4. *SDA_CW
5. *ACD_CLK
6. *ACD_EN
7. *ACD_CW
8. *FD_CLK
9. *FD_PD
10. *FD_EN
11. *FD_CW
12. *CUT_ON
13. *CLT_ON
14. *NIP1_ON
15. *SDOS_CNT
16. *RET_SDU
17. *SDOS_AD
18. *CHS
19. *CCS
20. *FCS
21. *NIP1_US
22. *NIP1_DS
23. SDOS
24. *DAS
25. 5V-1
26. GND

£-42 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Connector Function Pin No.
PCCN3 Exposure feed unit signals. 1. *MDM_CLK
2. *MDM_23
3. *MDM_PD
4. *MDM_EN
5. *MDM_CW
6. *NIP2_CLK
7. *NIP2_EN
8. *NIP3_CLK
9. *NIP3_EN
10. *NIP4_CLK
11. *NIP4_EN
12. *NIP_PD
13. STDS_AD
14. STDS
15. *NIP2_US
16. *NIP2_DS
17. *NIP3_US
18. *NIP3_DS
19. *NIP4_US
20. *NIP4_DS
21. *RET_EFU
22. GND
23. 5V-1
24. GND

Connector Function Pin No.


PCCN4 Discharge unit signals. 1. *PFU_TXD
2. *PFU_RXD
3. *PFU_RST
5. *PFU_BUSY
6. *FOM_DRV
7. *BPSA
8. *POSA
9. *BPSB
10. *POSB
11. *RET_PFU
13. 5V-1
4.12.14. GND

£-43 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Connector Function Pin No.
PCCN5 Communication with HEAD- 1. START
BUFF Circuit Board. 2. BCARRY1
・Carry signals. 3. GCARRY1
・Flashing. 4. RCARRY1
・Power control. 5. FLASHB
6. FLASHG
9. READY
10. RESETM
11. BSTART1
12. GSTART1
13. RSTART1
14. FB_START
15. FB_READY
16. FB_B_CH
19. FB_G_CH
20. FB_R_CH
21. CH_STS0
22. CH_STS1
23. PWR_B
24. PWR_G
25. STD_SENS
26. LED_ON
27. B_SEL_IN
28. G_SEL_IN
7.8.17.18.29.30. GND

Connector Function Pin No.


PCCN6 Communication with HEAD- 1. START
BUFF Circuit Board. 2. BCARRY1
・Carry signals. 3. GCARRY1
・Flashing. 4. RCARRY1
・Power control. 5. FLASHB
Note: Used for double feed 6. FLASHG
(not used on the R1). 9. READY
10. RESETM
11. BSTART1
12. GSTART1
13. RSTART1
14. FB_START
15. FB_READY
16. FB_B_CH
19. FB_G_CH
20. FB_R_CH
21. CH_STS0
22..CH_STS1
23. PWR_B
24..PWR_G
25..STD_SENS
26..LED_ON
27. B_SEL_IN
28.G_SEL_IN
7.8.17.18.29.30. GND

£-44 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Connector Function Pin No.
PCCN7 Sensor signals. 1. MGLS
・End of paper. 4. SPSA
・Splice. 5. PESA
・Magazine data. 6. SPSB
・Door. 7. PESB
9. PES_CNT
10. SPS_CNT
12. MSS5
13. MSS4
14. MSS3
15. MSS2
16. MSS1
17. MSS0
19. MG_SELA
20. MG_SELB
21. DOOR_SENS
3.8.11. 5V
2.18.22. GND

Connector Function Pin No.


PCCN8 Communication with double 1. DIN
magazine unit (serial bus). 2. *DIN
3. DOUT
4. *DOUT
5. SCLK
6. *SCLK
7. LACH
8. *LACH
9. *SD-CLK
10.11.12. NC

Connector Function Pin No.


PCCN9 Serial PC signals. 1. *TXD
2. *RXD
3. *RESET
4. GND
5. *DTR

Connector Function Pin No.


PCCN10 Serial paper processor 1. *MRRXD
signals. 2. *RBUSY
3. *MRTXD
4. *PRESET
5. NC
6. *RDRIVE
7. GND
8. *RINTLOCK
9. GND
10. NC

£-45 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Connector Function Pin No.
PCCN11 Power control signals. 1. *SUP33_CNT
・5V 2. *SUP5_CNT
・3.3V 3. *SUP24_CNT
・24V 4. COUNTER_CNT
5. FAN1_CNT
6. GND

Connector Function Pin No.


PCCN12 JTAG 1. TCK
2.10. GND
3. TDO
4.6. 3.3V
5. TMS
7.8. NC
9. TDI

5. On-board switches
SW Setting
SW1 Function:
[MODE] Sets hardware modes.
DIP switch settings:
Bit No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON/OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Setting details:
Bit No Setting Details/function
Bit 1 OFF
Bit 2 OFF
Bit 3 OFF
Bit 4 OFF
Bit 5 OFF
Bit 6 OFF
Bit 7 OFF

ON For factory use (to enable write to boot ROM).


Bit 8
OFF For normal use.

SW2 Function:
[RESET] Pressing this switch resets CPU.

£-46 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6. On-board test pins
TP Silk Terminal
TP2、TP5、TP6 [GND] GND terminal.
TP1 [5V] +5V check terminal.
TP3 [3.3V] +3.3V check terminal.
TP4 [2.5V] +2.5V check terminal.

£-47 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-17. LCD-CPU Circuit Board (2710H1030)

1. What it does

Controls the LCD on the printer.


Main items it controls:
・ LCD module.
・ Touch Panel.

2. External view and functions

(1) External view

(2) Dimensions.
155mm x 95mm x about 10mm (with four mounting holes).

(3) 基板機能
Functions.
CPU: HD64F2339 (12MHz clock).
LCD controller: M66273FP (Mitsubishi).
USB controller: ML60852A-TB (Oki).
I/O:
・Analog input 3 channels.
・Serial communication (RS-232-C) 1 channel.
・USB. 1 channel.
・LCD controller 1 channel.h

3. Power supplies
(1) +5V 1A (max )

£-48 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. Connectors
Connector Function Pin No.
LCCN1 LCD module. 1. V_LED
2. -24V
3. VD3
4. VD2
5. VD1
6. VD0
7. -24V
8. GND
9. 5V
10. CP
11. LP
12. FILM
13. NC
14. LEDENB

Connector Function Pin No.


LCCN2 Touch Panel. 1. Y1
2. X1
3. Y2
4. X2

Connector Function Pin No.


LCCN3 Power and serial communica- 1. +5V
tion (RS-232-C). 2. +5V
3. GND
4. GND
5. TXD
6. RXD
7. DSR
8. DTR

Connector Function Pin No.


LCCN4 USB 1. USB_VBUS
2. D-
3. D+
4. GND

Connector Function Pin No.


LCCN5 Power to inverter. 1. *CFL_ON
2. GND
3. +5V

£-49 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
5. On-board switches
SW Setting
SW1 Function:
[MODE] Sets hardware modes.
DIP switch settings:
Bit No 1
ON/OFF OFF

Setting details:
Bit No Setting Details/function

ON For factory use (to enable write to boot ROM).


Bit 1
OFF For normal use.

SW2 Function:
[RESET] Pressing this switch resets CPU.

6. On-board test pins


TP Silk Terminal
TP1 [5V] +5V check terminal.
TP2 [GND] GND terminal.
TP3 [3.3V] +3.3V terminal.
TP4 [VY 1] Touch Panel check terminal.
TP5 [VX] Touch Panel check terminal.
TP6 [-24V] -24V check terminal.
TP7 [-5V] -5V check terminal.
TP8 [DCP_OUT]
TP9 [V_LED] LCD contrast-adjusting voltage check terminal.

7. On-board potentiometers
LED Silk Function
VR1 [VR1] Key beeper volume adjustment.
Note: VR1 is factory-adjusted. Do not tamper with it in the field.

£-50 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-18. PSA Circuit Board (2710H1040)

1. What it does

In-line circuit board connecting power to the printer.


It distributes the DC power from the switching power supplies to the various units.
It also has the on-board DC-DC converter generating ±15V.

2. External view and functions

(1) External view

(2) Dimensions
190mm x 75mm x about 30mm (with six mounting holes).

(3) Functions.
Input:
・24V-1.
・24V-2.
・5V-1.
・5V-2.
Output:
・Dual magazine unit.
・Paper processor and LCD.
・Fan, electromagnetic counter, and paper dust removal fan.
・Power cooling fan.
・Power control signals.
・Spare.

3. Power supplies
(1) 24V-1 2.6A (MAX)
(2) 24V-2 1.3A (MAX)
(3) 5V-1 4.0A (MAX)
(4) 5V-2 1.7A (MAX)
(5) 36V 1.7A (MAX)

£-51 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. Connectors
Connector Function Pin No.
PSCN1 Power to dual magazine. 1. 5V-1
2. DGND
3. 24V-1
4. PGND
5. 36V
6. PGND

Connector Function Pin No.


PSCN2 Power to LCD and paper 1. 5V-2
processor. 2. DGND
3. +15V
4. AGND
5. -15V
6. PGND
7. 24V-2
8. 36V
9. 5V-2
10. DGND
11. 24V-2
12. PGND

Connector Function Pin No.


PSCN3 Fan and electromagnetic 1. 24V-2
counter 2. PGND
3. 24V-2
4. COUNTER_ON
5. 24V-1
6. FAN1_ON
7. NC
8. NC

Connector Function Pin No.


PSCN4 Densitometer. 1. 5V-1
2. DGND
3. 24V-1
4. PGND
Note: The connectors still have to be installed.

Connector Function Pin No.


PSCN5 Spare. 1. 5V-1
2. DGND
3. 24V-1
4. PGND

£-52 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Connector Function Pin No.
PSCN6 Input control signals. 1. SUP33_CNT
2. SUP5_CNT
3. SUP24_CNT
4. COUNTER_CNT
5. FAN1_CNT
6. DGND

Connector Function Pin No.


PSCN7 Input power. 1. 24V-2
2. PGND
3. 5V-2
4. DGND
5. 24V-1
6. PGND
7. 5V-1
8. DGND
9. 36V
10. PGND

Connector Function Pin No.


PSCN8 Power on/off signals. 1. RC+(3.3V)
2. RC-(3.3V)
3. RC+(5V)
4. RC-(5V)
5. RC+(24V)
6. NC

Connector Function Pin No.


PSCN9 Power unit cooling fan. 1. 24V-2
2. PGND

£-53 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
5. On-board test pins
TP Silk Terminal
TP1 [24V-1] +24V check terminal (with on-off control).
TP2 [36V] +36V check terminal.
TP3 [24V-2] +24V check terminal.
TP4 [+15V] +15V check terminal.
TP5 ]-15V] -15V check terminal.
TP6 [ND] GND terminal.
TP7 [5V-1] +5V check terminal (with on-off control).
TP8 [5V-2] +5V check terminal.

6. On-board LEDs
LED Silk What it indicates
LED1 [5V-1] Lights in red when 5V is applied (with on-off control).
LED2 [5V-2 ] Lights in green when 5V is applied.

£-54 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-19. SDU-DRV Circuit Board (2710H1200)

1. What it does

Driver circuit board for the sub-drive unit on the printer.


Main items it controls:
・Paper feed.
・Cutter.

2. External view and functions

(1) External view.

(2) Dimensions.
220mm x 74mm x about 30 mm (with six mounting holes).

(3) Functions.
I/O:
・ Logical input 7 channels.
・+5V output 1 channel.
・+24V output 3 channels.
・Pulse motor driver 3 channels.

3. Power supplies
(1) +5V 1A (max )
(2) +24V 4A (max)

£-55 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. Connectors
Connector Function Pin No.
SDCN1 Interface with PRINTER-CPU. 1. SD_CLK
2. *SD_PD
3. *SD_EN
4. *SD_CW
5. *ACD_CLK
6. *ACD_PD
7. *ACD_EN
8. *ACD_CW
9. *FD_CLK
10. *FD_EN
11. *FD_CW
12. *CUT_ON
13. *CLT_ON
14. *NIP1_ON
15. *SDOS_CNT
16. *RET_SDU
17. *SDOS_AD
18. *CHS
19. *CCS
20. *FCS
21. *NIP1US
22. *NIP1DS
23. SDOS
24. *DSA

Connector Function Pin No.


SDCN2 Power supplies. 1. 5V-1(with on-off control).
2. 24V-1
3. 24V-1
4. DGND
5. PGND
6. PGND

Connector Function Pin No.


SDCN3 Sub-drive motor. 1. SDM_A
2. SDM_*A
3. SDM_B
4. SDM_*B
5. COM(+24V)
6. COM(+24V)

£-56 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Connector Function Pin No.
SDCN4 Cutter unit. 1. +5V
2. CHS_IN
3. GND
4. +5V
5. CCS_IN
6. GND
7. CUT+
8. CUT-
9. +24V
10.+24V_RET
11.NC
12.NC

Connector Function Pin No.


SDCN5 Flap motor. 1. FDM_A
Electromagnetic brake. 2. FDM_*A
3. FDM_B
4. FDM_*B
5. COM(+24V)
6. COM(+24V)
7. +24V
8. *CLT_DRV

Connector Function Pin No.


SDCN6 Accumulator motor. 1. ADM_A
Nip 1 solenoid. 2. ADM_*A
Nip 1 sensor. 3. ADM_B
SD exit sensor. 4. ADM_*B
5. COM(+24V)
6. COM(+24V)
7. +24V
8. *NIP1_DRV
9. +5V
10.NIP1US_IN
11. GND
12. +5V
13. NIP1DS_IN
14. GND
15. +5V
16. *LED_DRV
17. *SDOS_IN
18. NC

Connector Function Pin No.


SDCN7 Sensor signals. 1. +5V
・Duct sensor. 2. DAS_IN
・Flap close sensor. 3. FCS_IN
4. GND

£-57 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
5. On-board test pins
TP Silk Terminal
TP1 [5V] +5V check terminal.
TP2 [24V-1] +24V check terminal.
TP4 [GND] GND terminal.
TP5 [SDM] Sub-drive motor clock.
TP6 [ADM] Accumulator motor clock.
TP7 [FDM] Flap motor clock.
TP8 [CLT] Electromagnetic brake-on signal.
TP9 [CUT] Cutter-on signal.
TP10 [NIP1] Nip 1 solenoid-on signal.

£-58 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-20. EFU-DRV Circuit Board (2710H1210)

1. What it does

Driver circuit board for the exposure feed unit on the printer.
Main items it controls:
・Paper feed.
・Nip rollers.

2. External view and functions

(1) External view.

(2) Dimensions.
180mm x 80mm x about 30mm (with six mounting holes).

(3) Functions.
I/O:
・Logical input 7 channels.
・+5V output 4 channels.
・Clock output 1 channel.
・Pulse motor driver 3 channels.

3. Power supplies
(1) +5V 1.0A(max )
(2) +24V 3.5A(max)

£-59 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. Connectors
Connector Function Pin No.
EFCN1 Interface with Printer CPU. 1. *MDM_CLK
2. *MDM_W23
3. *MDM_PD
4. *MDM_EN
5. *MDM_CW
6. *NIP2D_CLK
7. *NIP2D_EN
8. *NIP3D_CLK
9. *NIP3D_EN
10. *NIP4D_CLK
11. *NIP4_EN
12. *NIP_PD
13. NC
14. STDS
15. *NIP2US
16. *NIP2DS
17. *NIP3US
18. *NIP3DS
19. *NIP4US
20. *NIP4DS
21. 22. 23. 24. NC

Connector Function Pin No.


EFCN2 Power supply. 1. 5V-1(with on-off control).
2. 24V-1
3. 24V-1
4. DGND
5. PGND
6. PGND

Connector Function Pin No.


EFCN3 Sensors. 1. 4.7.10.13.16.19. +5V
2. NIP2US
5. NIP2DS
8. NIP3US
11. NIP3DS
14. NIP4US
17. NIP4DS
20. *STDS
3.6.9.12.15.18.21. GND
22. NC

£-60 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Connector Function Pin No.
EFCN4 NIP2 motor. 1. NIP2D_A
2. NIP2D_*A
3. NIP2D_B
4. NIP2D_*B
5. COM(+24V)
6. COM(+24V)

Connector Function Pin No.


EFCN5 NIP3 motor. 1. NIP3D_A
2. NIP3D_*A
3. NIP3D_B
4. NIP3D_*B
5. COM(+24V)
6. COM(+24V)

Connector Function Pin No.


EFCN6 NIP4 motor. 1. NIP4D_A
2. NIP4D_*A
3. NIP4D_B
4. NIP4D_*B
5. COM(+24V)
6. COM(+24V)

5. On-board test pins


Test pin Silk Terminal
TP1 [5V] +5Vcheck terminal.
TP2 [NIP2_PS] +24V check terminal for NIP2 motor.
TP3 [GND] GND terminal.
TP4 [MDM] Main feed motor clock.
TP5 [NIP2] NIP2 motor clock.
TP6 [NIP3] NIP3 motor clock.
TP7 [NIP4] NIP4 motor clock.
TP8 [NIP3_PS] +24V check terminal for NIP3 motor.
TP9 [NIP4_PS] +24V check terminal for NIP4 motor.

£-61 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-21. PFU-DRV Circuit Board (2710H1230)

1. What it does

Controls the discharge unit on the printer.


Main items it controls:
・Paper feed.
・Back printer.

2. External view and functions

(1) External view.

(2) Dimensions.
157mm x 104mm x about 30 mm (with four mounting holes).

(3) Functions.
CPU: HD64F2338 (25MHz clock).
I/O:
Logical input 5 channels.
+5V output 12 channels.
+24V output 15 channels.
Clock output 2 channels.
Serial communication (RS-232-C) 1 channel.
Pulse motor driver 1 channel.

3. Power supplies
(1) +5V 1A (max )
(2) +24V 2A (max)

£-62 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. Connectors
Connector Function Pin No.
PFCN1 Communication with 1. *P-CPU_RXD
PRINTER-CPU.) 2. *PFU_BUSY
Serial communication 3. *P-CPU_TXD
(RS-232-C). 4. *PFU_RST
Status communication. 5. *FOM_DRV
6. BPSA
7. GND
8. POSA
9. BPSB
10. POSB

Connector Function Pin No.


PFCN2 Power. 1. 5V-1(with on-off control).
2. 24V
3. PGND
4. DGND
5. 24V
6. PGND

Connector Function Pin No.


PFCN3 Pulse motor. 1. FOM_A
2. FOM_*A
3. FOM_B
4. FOM_*B
5. COM(+24V)
6. COM(+24V)

Connector Function Pin No.


PFCN4 Print head (BP1). 1. *bit1
2. *bit3
3. *bit5
4. *bit7
5. +24V
6. +24V
7. NC
8. *bit6
9. *bit4
10.*bit2
11.NC
12.PGND

£-63 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Connector Function Pin No.
PFCN5 Print head (BP2).) 1. *bit1
2. *bit3
3. *bit5
4. *bit7
5. +24V
6. +24V
7. NC
8. *bit6
9. *bit4
10.*bit2
11.NC
12.PGND

Connector Function Pin No.


PFCN6 Ribbon motor. 1. +24V
2. *RibonM

Connector Function Pin No.


PFCN7 Sensor signals: 1. +5V
・BP reference sensor. 2. *POSA
・Exit sensor. 3. GND
4. +5V
5. *BPSA
6. GND
7. +5V
8. *BPSB
9. GND
10. +5V
11. *POSB
12. GND

Connector Function Pin No.


PFCN8 Exposure feed unit- 1. +24V
cooling fan. 2. PGND

Connector Function Pin No.


PFCN9 Print head (for double feed). 1. *BPD1
3. *BPD2
5. *BPD3
7. *BPD4
9. *BPD5
11.*BPD6
13.*BPD7
15.*BPSP
17.*BPD8
2.4.6.8.10.12.14.16.18. +5V
19.20. GND

£-64 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Connector Function Pin No.
PFCN10 Power to print head 1. +24V
(for double feed). 2. PGND

5. On-board switches
SW Setting
SW1 Function:
[MODE] Sets hardware modes.
DIP switch settings:
Bit No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON/OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Setting details:
Bit No Setting Details/function
Bit 1 OFF
Bit 2 OFF
Bit 3 OFF
Bit 4 OFF
Bit 5 OFF
Bit 6 OFF
Bit 7 OFF
For factory use
ON
Bit 8 (to enable write to boot ROM).
OFF For normal use.

SW2 Function:
[RESET] Pressing this switch resets CPU.

6. On-board test pins


TP Silk Terminal
TP1 [5V] +5V check terminal.
TP2 [GND] GND check terminal.
TP3 [3.3V] +3.3V check terminal.
TP4 [24V] +24V check terminal.
TP5 [PG] PGND terminal.
TP6 [FOM_CK] Discharge motor clock.
TP7 [BP_ON] BP-on signal.
TP8 [BP_STB] BP strobe signal.
TP9 [BP_CLK] Clock reference for control of BP.

£-65 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-22. SCANNER DRIVING board (56GA-9090-00)

1. What it does

Drive and control 3 phase stepping motor

2. External view and functions

(1) External view

(2) Dimensions
94 x 17 x around 45 mm (with four mounting holes)

3. Supplied power
(1) +5V 1A(max )
(2) +24V 4A(max)

£-66 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. Connectors
Connector Function Pin No..
CN600 Power supply (input) 1. +5V
2. GND
3、4. +24V
5、6. PG

Connector Function Pin No.


CN610 Motor control signal 1. MCLK
2. MA/*LEFT
3. W23P/*23P
4. V0
5. V1
6. V2
7∼15. not used

Note: CN621, CN622 and CN623 are not used.

5. On-board test pins


TP Silk Terminal
TP1 [SGND] SGND
TP2 [5V] +5V check terminal
TP3 [PGND] PGND
TP4 [24V] +24V check terminal
Note: There are any real test pins on board.

£-67 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-23. HEAD-TRM board (2710H1220)

1. What it does

Relay board for power supply of exposure head.


S-ROM for saving the data of exposure head is mounted on the board.

2. External view and functions

(1) External view

(2) Dimensions
70×50×around 15mm (with four mounting holes)

(3) Function
Input
5V-2
24V-2
3.3V
Output
・VFPH power supply board
・LED exposure head

3. Supplied power
(1) 5V-2 0.5A (MAX)
(2) 24V-2 1.0A (MAX)
(3) 3.3V 10A (MAX)

£-68 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. Connectors
Connector Function Pin No.
HTCN1 Power (Input) 1. +5V
2. +24V
3. +3.3V
4. GND
5. GND
6. GND

Connector Function Pin No.


HTCN2 LED Head power supply 1∼10. 3.3V
11∼20. GND

Connector Function Pin No.


HTCN3 VFPH power supply board 1. +5V
2. GND
3. +24V
4. PG
5. B_CONT
6. GND
7. B_SEL
8. GND
9. +5V
10.GND
11.+24V
12.PG
13.G_CONT
14.GND
15.G_SEL
16.GND

Connector Function Pin No.


HTCN4 S-ROM control 1. ROM_CS
VFPH power supply control 2. ROM_SCK
3. ROM_SI
4. ROM_SO
5. BG_CONT
6. BG_SEL

£-69 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-24. Fluorescent print head power supply board (271076903)

1. What it does

Dedicated power supply board for fluorescent print head

2. External view and functions

(1) External view

(2) Dimensions
70 x 120 x around 20 mm (with 4 mounting holes)

(3) Functions
Supply power to Fluorescent print heads
1. Filament drive voltage (Ef)
2. Grid drive voltage (Ecc)
3. Anode drive voltage (Ebb)

3. Supplied voltage
(1) 5V 0.5A(MAX)
(2) 24V 1.0A(MAX)

£-70 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. Connectors
Connector Function Pin No.
CN1 Power 1. Vin(+24V)
2. GND
3. Vdd(+5V)
4. GND

Connector Function Pin No.


CN2 VFPH power 1. Ef1
2. Ef2
3. Ecc
4. Vdd
5. GND
6. Ebb

Connector Function Pin No.


CN3 VFPH control signal 1. PWON (EF, ECC and Ebb output control signal inputterminal)
2. GND
3. VSEL (Ef and Ecc voltage setting change control signal input terminal
4. GND
5. N.C

£-71 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-25. Inverter board (584076302A)

1. What it does

Inverter board for LCD backlight

2. External view and functions

(1) External view

(2) Dimensions
20 x 100 x around 10 mm (with two mounting holes)

(3) Functions
Input voltage (VB) 4.5 through Vdc
Output voltage (Vao) 8.50 through 1200 Vrms

3. Supplied voltage
(1) 5V 0.6A(MAX)

4. Connectors

Connector Function Pin No.


CN71 Input power 1. CFL ON/OFF
2. GND
3. VB(5V)

Connector Function Pin No.


CN77 Output power 1. OUT H
2. (N.C)
3. (N.C)
4. OUT L

£-72 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
■Processor

3-26. Processor-CPU (3590H1500)

1. Outline and external view

(1) External view

(2) Size
170 mm x 170 mm x approxi. 40 mm
(Six board mounting holes provided)

(3) Functions
CPU: µPD78C10 (Clock of 14.7456 MHz)
ROM: 27512 x 1 (49 KB)
RAM: 55257 x 1 (8 KB)

£-73 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
(4) Main I/O

Input system
• Analog input (for temperature measurement, paper detection (ECOJET feeder), sensor
application), 12 channels
• +5 V input (Dip switch, float switch, microswitch, etc.), 34 channels
Output system
• +5 V output (motor, heater, etc.), 40 channels
Communication system
• Serial communication (for master), 34 channel

2. Power supply

(1) +5 V, 1 A (max.)
(2) ±15 V, 0.2 A (max.)

3. Connectors

Connector RCN1 (JAE TX13-50P-D2ST-HI)

Function Sensor-related input signal and LED display output

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 +5 V
2 +5 V
3 +5 V
4 +5 V
5 +5 V
6 +5 V
7 GND
8 GND
9 GND
10 GND
11 GND
12 GND
13 P1LLEV (P1 tank level sensor)
14 P2LLEV (P2 tank level sensor)
15 P3LLEV (P3-3 tank level sensor)
16 SQA type: P1 repl. sensor, J type: WATLLEV (Water supply tank level sensor)
17 SQA type: P2 repl. sensor, J type: P3/LLEV (P3-1 tank level sensor)
18 SQA type: P3 repl. sensor, J type: INSP14 (Spare)
19 OFALEV (Overflow upper limit sensor)
20 OFBLEV (Overflow lower limit sensor)
21 SORTSET (Sorter set position detection) *1
22 CONVSET (Conveyor set detection) *1
23 ––
24 OVRSW1 (Overflow switch)
25 OVRSW2– –
26 CONVHP1 (Conveyor home position detection 1) *1
(Continue)

£-74 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Connector RCN1 (JAE TX13-50P-D2ST-HI)

Function Sensor-related input signal and LED display output

No. Pin assignment Remark

27 SORTHP (Sorter home position detection) *1


28 CONVHP2 (Conveyor home position detection 2) *1
29 ACRS1 (ACR-40 water supply tank level sensor) *2
30 ACRS2 (ACR-40 overflow tank level sensor) *2
31 INSP10 – – *2
32 OVRALED (Overflow switch LED) *2
33 OVRBLED – – *2
34 ––
35 ––
36 ––
37 ––
38 EXS1 (Outlet OUT1 sensor output)
39 EXS1LED (Outlet OUT1 LED drive)
40 EXS2 (Outlet OUT2 sensor output)
41 EXS2LED (Outlet OUT2 LED drive)
42 ––
43 P1TEMP (P1 temperature sensor input)
44 GA (Ground for analog system)
45 P2TEMP (P2 temperature sensor input)
46 GA (Ground for analog system)
47 P3TEMP (P3 temperature sensor input)
48 GA (Ground for analog system)
49 DRYTEMP (DRY temperature sensor input)
50 GA (Ground for analog system)
*1: Not used on R1 SUPER.
*2: Used on ACR-40 connected.

£-75 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Connector RCN2 (JAE PS-40PE-D4T1-M1)

Function +5 V system signal output

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 DRYH2 (Dryer heater 2)


2 DRYH1 (Dryer heater 1)
3 P3H (P3 heater)
4 DRFAN/CLFAN (Dryer fan/cooling fan)
5 P2H (P2 heater)
6 P1H (P1 heater)
7 OVRPUMP (Overflow transter pump) *1
8 SP1 Spare
9 SQA type: P3RPUMP (P3 repl. pump), J type: Water pump Not used on J type.
10 SQA type: P2RPUMP (P2 repl. pump), J type: Water pump Not used on J type.
11 SQA type: P1RPUMP (P1 repl. pump), J type: Water pump Not used on J type.
12 P3CPUMP (P3 circulation pump)
13 P2CPUMP (P2 circulation pump)
14 P1CPUMP (P1 circulation pump)
15 SP5 Spare
16 SP6 Spare
17 SP7 Spare
18 SP8 Spare
19 PCFAN (Pump cooling fan)
20 EXFAN (Exhaust fan)
21 SP2 Spare
22 CONV (Conveyor motor)
23 CONVBK
24 SORT (Sorter motor)
25 SORTBK
26 BZ (Buzzer)
27 SP3 Spare
28 SP4 Spare
29 SP9 Spare
30 N. C.
31 P1JMOTCW (P1 J motor) Not used on SQA type.
32 P1JMOTCWW Not used on SQA type.
33 P2JMOTCW (P2 J motor) Not used on SQA type.
34 P2JMOTCWW Not used on SQA type.
35 P3JMOTCW (P3 J motor) Not used on SQA type.
36 P3JMOTCWW Not used on SQA type.
37 +5 V
38 +5 V
39 GND
40 GND
*1: Used on J type of CE machine.

£-76 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Connector RCN3 (MOLEX 5267-08A)

Function Communication with Processor-CPU

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 MRRXD
2 MRTXD
3 MRRXD
4 RESET
5 ––
6 RDRIVE
7 GND
8 ––

Connector RCN4 (MOLEX 5267-07A)

Function Control signal with drive motor

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 +5 V
2 FCLK
3 LOK
4 MODE
5 GND
6 +15 V
7 TRG

Connector RCN5 (MOLEX 5277-06A)

Function DC power supply

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 +5 V
2 GND
3 GND
4 +15 V
5 GA
6 -15 V

Connector RCN6 (JAE PS-20PE-D4T1-B1)

Function External expansion signal

No. Pin assignment Remark

–– ––

£-77 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Connector RCN7 (JAE PS-50PE-D4T1-M1) (On J type only)

Function Temperature sensor input

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 5V
2 5V
3 5V
4 5V
5 GND
6 GND
7 GND
8 GND
9 ––
10 ––
11 ––
12 ––
13 ––
14 Spare
15 Spare
16 ––
17 INSP1 Spare
18 INSP2 Spare
19 INSP3 Spare
20 JHOM1 Spare
21 JHOM2 Spare
22 JHOM3 Spare
23 JOPEN Spare
24 INSP4 Spare
25 INSP5 Spare
26 INSP6 Spare
27 INSP7 Spare
28 SP3
29 JSP4
30 REPDISP Spare
31 P1GLED
32 P1RLED
33 P2GLED
34 P2RLED
35 P3GLED
36 P3RLED
37 JSP1
38 ––
39 P1JPOSS (P1-J position sensor 1)
40 P1JPLED (P1-J position sensor 1 LED)
41 P1JPOSS (P1-J position sensor 2)
42 P1JPLED (P1-J position sensor 2 LED)
43 P2JPOSS (P2-J position sensor 1)
44 P2JPLED (P2-J position sensor 1 LED)
45 P2JPOSS (P2-J position sensor 2)
46 P2JPLED (P2-J position sensor 2 LED)
47 P3JPOSS (P3-J position sensor 1)
48 P3JPLED (P3-J position sensor 1 LED)
49 P3JPOSS (P3-J position sensor 2)
50 P3JPLED (P3-J position sensor 2 LED)

£-78 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. Switches and test mode

(1) SW1 (RESET)


This switch resets the CPU on this circuit board.
Pressing this switch makes the CPU restart the program from the beginning.
If there occurs something abnormal in the CPU such as its runaway, etc., press this switch.
After pressing this switch, press the operation switch to make a fresh start with operation mode.

(2) DSW1

Bit Function Setting

1
During test mode:
2 selecting of test item
During ordinary mode: (all OFF set at factory)
3 During single unit test mode:
possible of assigning functions
4

5
Selecting of test mode (all OFF set at factory)
6

ON: test start


7 Start of test
OFF: test stop (set at factory)

ON: test mode


8 Executing of test mode
OFF: ordinary mode (set at factory)

When the DSW1-8 has set to the OFF position, close the power breaker again.

£-79 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
(3) Test mode and test method
1 Set DSW1-8 to the ON position.
(The test mode is activated, during this time when the normal operation is inhibited.)
2 Select the test mode.

Bit DSW1 - 5 DSW1 - 6 Test item

1 OFF OFF Not used

2 ON OFF Output test 1

3 OFF ON Output test 2

4 ON ON Single unit test

The single unit test starts when DSW1-5, -6, -7 and -8 are set to the ON position.

3 Select a test item.


Select a test item and test condition for DSW1-1 to DSW1-4. (Refer to the “FUNCTION
SELECT MAP”.)

4 To start testing turn on DSW1-7.


• If DSW1-1 through DSW1-4 are activated in the test operation, the test except the single unit
is stopped.
• If DSW1-5 and DSW1-6 are activated in the test operation, the test is stopped.

5 To stop testing turn off DSW1-7.

6 To terminate the test mode, turn off DSW1-8. After selecting a function as needed, turn off the
power breaker at one time and turn it on again.

£-80 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
FUNCTION SELECT MAP (For SQA type)
Output Test 1

No. DSW1 - 1 DSW1 - 2 DSW1 - 3 DSW1 - 4 Description

0 OFF OFF OFF OFF Drive motor test


1 ON OFF OFF OFF Conveyor motor test
2 OFF ON OFF OFF Conveyor sorter test
3 ON ON OFF OFF Exhaust fan test
4 OFF OFF ON OFF Dryer/Dryer cooling fan test
5 ON OFF ON OFF P1 repl. pump test
6 OFF ON ON OFF P2 repl. pump test
7 ON ON ON OFF P3 repl. pump test
8 OFF OFF OFF ON P1 circulation pump test
9 ON OFF OFF ON P2 circulation pump test
A OFF ON OFF ON P3 circulation pump test
B ON ON OFF ON ––
C OFF OFF ON ON Pump cooling fan test
D ON OFF ON ON ––
E OFF ON ON ON P1 heater test (Completed in 10 sec.)*
F ON ON ON ON P2 heater test (Completed in 10 sec.)*
* With level check

Output Test 2

No. DSW1 - 1 DSW1 - 2 DSW1 - 3 DSW1 - 4 Description

0 OFF OFF OFF OFF P3 heater test (Completed in 10 sec.) *


1 ON OFF OFF OFF DRY1 heater test (Completed in 10 sec.)**
2 OFF ON OFF OFF DRY2 heater test (Completed in 10 sec.)**
3 ON ON OFF OFF MODE display test
4 OFF OFF ON OFF ––
5 ON OFF ON OFF Buzzer test
6 OFF ON ON OFF ––
* With solution level check
** Dryer fan on together

£-81 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
For single test

Setting of SW1 dip switches in single operation mode

DSW1
No. Paper width Dry temperature
1 2 3 4
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF 89 mm 62.8°C
1 ON OFF OFF OFF 127 mm 62.8°C
2 OFF ON OFF OFF 152 mm 62.8°C
3 ON ON OFF OFF 203 mm 62.8°C
4 OFF OFF ON OFF 89 mm 65.0°C
5 ON OFF ON OFF 127 mm 65.0°C
6 OFF ON ON OFF 152 mm 65.0°C
7 ON ON ON OFF 203 mm 65.0°C
8 OFF OFF OFF ON 89 mm 62.8°C
9 ON OFF OFF ON 89 mm 62.8°C
A OFF ON OFF ON 89 mm 62.8°C
B ON ON OFF ON 89 mm 62.8°C
C OFF OFF ON ON 89 mm 62.8°C
D ON OFF ON ON 89 mm 62.8°C
E OFF ON ON ON 89 mm 62.8°C
F ON ON ON ON 89 mm 62.8°C

(4) Procedure of single unit test

(a) Setting of DSW1


1 Select test mode, and set DSW1-5 through DSW1-8 to the ON position to start testing.
2 Set paper width and dryer temperature according to the separate papers.
(Note: Specified values depend on the type of ROM.)
* If any of DSW1-5 to DSW1-8 is turned off in the test operation, all loads are canceled.
When testing in test mode again, repeat the operation 1 above.
3 To terminate the test mode.
• Recover setting of DSW1 to normal mode. Turn off the power breaker at one time, and
then turn it on again.
• When the dryer temperature is high, turn off DSW1-8 until the dryer fan continues ON
status for 5 minutes and then stops.

£-82 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
(b) Setting values for the single unit test (setup temperature and refilling time for P1 through P3)

P1 Set temperature: 39.8°C


P2 Set temperature: 36.8°C
P3 Set temperature: 38.0°C

P1 Replenisher volume: 79mL


P2 Replenisher volume: 99mL
P3 Replenisher volume: 197mL
Replenisher supply operation starts for approximately 0.984 m2 paper processed area.

P1 Replenishing cycle: Economizer tab starts for approximately 3.24 m2 paper processed
area
P2 Replenishing cycle: Economizer tab starts for approximately 1.62 m2 paper processed
area
P3 Replenishing cycle: Economizer tab starts for approximately 9.72 m2 paper processed
area

Note:
When paper is advanced by single unit operation, the paper length is measured and the
processed area is calculated at the outlet. At this time, replenishment area data and
replenishment count are set by the CPU. Therefore, when, after single unit testing, the
processor is connected to the printer, it needs to correct the stored data (or to clear the RAM
data).

(c) Control
1 Temperatures of P1 to DRY are controlled according to their setup temperatures.
2 The temperature control for P3 with the circulation pump ON is completed by the following
thermostat operation. (The circulation pump continues the ON condition for one minute after
the setup temperature has dropped by 1°C, and the pump continues forced circulation for
30 minutes when the setup temperature has not dropped by 1ÅãC, during the period of
which the temperature control is not considered as having completed.
3 The cooler Sig is controlled according to the temperature set for P1 or P3.
ON: At temperature of more than 0.1°C higher than for P1 or more than 0.4°C higher than
for P3.
OFF: Below the temperature than the temperatures set for P1 and P3.

£-83 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
5. Test pins

Test pin Designation Description Remark


TP1 +5 V 5V power supply checking terminal
TP2 GND Logic ground terminal
TP3 +15 V +15V power supply checking terminal
TP4 -15 V -15V power checking terminal
TP5 P1-J position sensor 1 checking terminal Not used on SQA type.
TP6 P1-J position sensor 2 checking terminal Not used on SQA type.
TP7 P2-J position sensor 1 checking terminal Not used on SQA type.
TP8 P2-J position sensor 2 checking terminal Not used on SQA type.
TP9 P3-J position sensor 1 checking terminal Not used on SQA type.
TP10 P3-J position sensor 2 checking terminal Not used on SQA type.
TP11 EXS1 outlet sensor 1 checking terminal
TP12 EXS2 outlet sensor 2 checking terminal
TP13 CLK FCLK terminal
TP14 MODE MODE terminal
TP15 TRG TRG terminal
TP16 LOK LOK terminal
TP17 V2 Terminal at analog circuit input side
TP18 V1 1.04V checking terminal
TP19 VOUT Terminal at analog circuit output side
TP20 VREF Reference voltage(4.8V) checking terminal
TP21 1.5 V 1.5V checking terminal
TP22 RESET Reset signal terminal
TP23 Open(used at factory)
TP24 Open(used at factory)
TP25 GND GND terminal
TP26 VBT Battery power supply checking terminal
TP27 External reset terminal
TP28 MRTXD terminal
TP29 PBUSY terminal
TP30 MRTXD terminal
TP31 GA Analog ground terminal

£-84 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6. LEDs

(1) Description

Test pin Designation Description Remark

LED1 Indicates states such as mode, error. (7seg. LED)


LED2 RUN On during CPU operation.
LED3 Lights up while P1 tank level is normal.
LED4 Lights up while P2 tank level is normal.
LED5 Lights up while P3-3 tank level is normal.
LED6 Lights up while water supply tank level is normal.
LED7 Lights up while P3-1 tank level is normal.
LED8
LED9 Lights up while overflow does not reach upper limit.
LED10 Turns on when overflow lower limit has been detected.
LED11 Turns on when sorter unit has been set.
LED12 Turns on when conveyor unit has been set.
LED13
LED14 Turns on when switching ECOJET tab ON. Not used on SQA type.
LED15
LED16 Turns on when switching overflow transfer ON.
LED17 Not used
LED18 Not used
LED19 Not used
LED20 Not used
LED21 Not used
LED22 Not used
LED23 Not used
LED24 Turns on when temperature control tank cover has been set.
LED25 Not used
LED26 Not used
LED27 Not used
LED28 Not used
LED29 Not used
LED30 Not used
LED31 Not used
LED32 Not used
LED33 Not used
LED34 Turns on when EXS2 paper has been detected.
LED35 Turns on when EXS1 paper has been detected.
LED36 Turns on when P3-J position sensor 2 has been lightproofed. Not used on SQA type.
LED37 Turns on when P3-J position sensor 1 has been lightproofed. Not used on SQA type.
LED38 Turns on when P2-J position sensor 2 has been lightproofed. Not used on SQA type.
LED39 Turns on when P2-J position sensor 1 has been lightproofed. Not used on SQA type.
LED40 Turns on when P1-J position sensor 2 has been lightproofed. Not used on SQA type.
LED41 Turns on when P1-J position sensor 1 has been lightproofed. Not used on SQA type.
LED42 Turns on when conveyor stop position 1 has been detected.
LED43 Turns on when sorter stop position has been detected.
LED44 Turns on when conveyor stop position 2 has been detected.
LED45 TRG Turns on when motor drive position 2 has been detected.
LED46 MODE Always goes off when motor speed has been changed.
LED47 LOK Lights up while motor is normally running.

£-85 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
(2) LED1 mode display

1) When no error occurs, the current condition is displayed.

CONDITION 1F CONDITION 2F
0 Blank COND. 1 COND. 2

5 1
6

4 2
3 7

Condition 1 Condition 2
Bit
ON OFF ON OFF

0 Backup data RAM initialization Under replenishment NO

1 OPERATE switch ON OFF Paper present Paper absent

Operation mode in
2 Temperature control Inhibited NO
cold climate

P1 temp. control
3 –– Not used Not yet completed
completed

P2 temp. control
4 Manual drive OFF Not yet completed
completed

P3 temp. control
5 Automatic drive OFF Not yet completed
completed

Dryer standby
6 Not yet completed Ready for processing Impossible
completed

7 –– Not used –– Not used

2) When an error occurs, the error is displayed. (The error is indicated by 7-segment LED.)
Relation between error number and error indication: An error is displayed according to the
status data transmitted.

No. Error item


0 ROM
1 RAM
2 Communication
3 ––
4 Processing tank level (P1 to P3)
5 Overflow
6 ––
7 Abnormal temperature at the upper limit (P1 to P3 and DRY)
8 Abnormal temperature at the lower limit (P1 to P3 and DRY)
9 Abnormal warning temperature (P1 to P3 and DRY)
A Jamming
B ––
C ––
D ––
E ––

£-86 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7. Variable resistors

VR Designation Description Remark


VR1 A Amplifier gain adjustment
VR2 V2 Bias voltage adjustment
VR3 P2 P2 input adjustment
VR4 P3 P3 input adjustment
VR5 DRY DRY input adjustment
VR6 VRG Bridge voltage adjustment
VR7 VREF Reference voltage adjustment
VR8 P1JPOSS P1 position sensor 1 voltage adjustment Not used on SQA type.
VR9 P2JPOSS P2 position sensor 1 voltage adjustment Not used on SQA type.
VR10 P3JPOSS P3 position sensor 1 voltage adjustment Not used on SQA type.
VR11 P1JROTS P1 position sensor 2 voltage adjustment Not used on SQA type.
VR12 P2JROTS P2 position sensor 2 voltage adjustment Not used on SQA type.
VR13 P3JROTS P3 position sensor 2 voltage adjustment Not used on SQA type.
VR14 EXS1 EXS1 paper detection voltage adjustment
VR15 EXS2 EXS2 paper detection voltage adjustment
VR16 P1 P1 input adjustment

8. Adjustment

(1) Supply voltage check

Supply voltage Measurement point Measurement means Rated voltage

+5 V TP1 (+5 V) - TP2 (GND) Digital voltmeter +5±0.15 V

+15 V TP3 (+15 V) - TP31 (GA) Digital voltmeter +15±0.3 V

-15 V TP3 (+15 V) - TP31 (GA) Digital voltmeter -15±0.3 V

(2) A-D converter reference voltage adjustment

Supply Measurement Adjustment Rated


voltage means Measurement point VR voltage

VRef Digital voltmeter TP20-TP31 VR7 4.800±0.001 V

(3) Bridge voltage adjustment

Supply Adjustment Measurement Rated Measured


voltage Measurement point VR means voltage voltage

VRG TP21 (1.5 V) -TP31 (GA) VR6 (VRG) Digital voltmeter 1.5±0.001 V

£-87 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
(4) Actual temperature adjustment
This adjustment should be conducted after the temperature control operation.
Compare the temperatures in the Mode-2-5-2 with actual solution temperatures of the processing
tanks, and adjust the displayed temperature according to the following table.

Setup Displayed Actual solution Difference (3) Standard Adjusting


Reference
temperature temperature (1) temperature (2) (2) - (1) difference VR

P1 39.8°C °C °C °C ±0.3°C VR16

P2 36.8°C °C °C °C ±0.4°C VR3

P3 38.0°C °C °C °C ±0.4°C VR4

(5) Outlet sensor output voltage adjustment

Supply Measurement Adjustment Rated


voltage means Measurement point VR voltage

EXS1 (without paper) Digital voltmeter TP11-TP2 VR14 Higher than 3.00 V

EXS1 (with paper*) Digital voltmeter TP11-TP2 VR14 Lower than 1.00 V

EXS2 (without paper) Digital voltmeter TP12-TP2 VR15 Higher than 3.00 V

EXS2 (with paper*) Digital voltmeter TP12-TP2 VR15 lower than 1.00 V

* The sensor is located in the outlet of the printer processor.

9. Dip SW

[PP-8610EB/TB]
Board name Setting Remarks

PROCESSOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SQA
-CPU board DSW1 : OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF type

[PP-8611B/UB/TB]
Board name Setting Remarks

PROCESSOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J type
-CPU board DSW1 : OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

£-88 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3-27. Processor-Drive (3850H1510)

1. Outline and external view

(1) External view

(2) Size
270 mm x 115 mm x approx. 40 mm
(Six board mounting holes provided.)
(3) Functions
Output control: Output is controlled according to the serial data from the PROCESSOR-CPU.
Output system: 5 VDC (buzzer use), 1 channel
24 VDC, 13 channels
100 VAC, 8 channels
200 VAC, 2 channels

2. Power supply

(1) +5 V, 1 A (max.)
(2) +24 V, 1 A (max.)
(3) 100 VAC, 5 A (max.)
(4) 200 VAC (out of service)

£-89 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3. Connectors

Connector DCN1 (JAE PS-40PE-D4T1-M1)

Function External extension signal

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 DRYH2 (DRY Heater 2)


2 DRYH1 (DRY Heater 1)
3 P3H (P3 Heater)
4 DRFAN/CLFAN (Dryer Fan/Cooling Fan)
5 P2H (P2 Heater)
6 P1H (P1 Heater)
7 OVRPUMP (Overflow Transfer Pump) Used on J type of CE machine.
8 SP1 Spare
9 SQA type: P3RPUMP (P3 repl. Pump) / J type: Water pump
10 SQA type: P2RPUMP (P2 repl. Pump) / J type: Water pump
11 SQA type: P1RPUMP (P1 repl. Pump) / J type: Water pump
12 P3CPUMP (P3 Circulation Pump)
13 P2CPUMP (P2 Circulation Pump)
14 P1CPUMP (P1 Circulation Pump)
15 SP5 Spare
16 SP6 Spare
17 SP7 Spare
18 N. C.
19 PCFAN (Pump Cooling Fan)
20 EXFAN (Exhaust Fan)
21 SP2 Spare
22 CONV (Conveyor Motor)
23 CONVBK
24 SORT (Sorter Motor)
25 SORTBK
26 BZ (Buzzer)
27 N. C.
28 N. C.
29 N. C.
30 N. C.
31 P1JMOTCW Not used on SQA type.
32 P1JMOTCCW Not used on SQA type.
33 P2JMOTCW Not used on SQA type.
34 P2JMOTCCW Not used on SQA type.
35 P3JMOTCW Not used on SQA type.
36 P3JMOTCCW Not used on SQA type.
37 +5 V
38 +5 V
39 GND
40 GND

£-90 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Connector DCN2 (MOLEX 5285-03A)

Function Heater drive

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 N. C.
2 N. C.
3 N. C.

Connector DCN3 (MOLEX 5267-06A)

Function DRY heater, P3 heater control signal output

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 +5 V
2 DRY HEATER 2
3 DRY HEATER 1
4 P3 HEATER
5 DRY FAN / CL FAN
6 P1 HEATER

Connector DCN4 (MOLEX 5277-04A)

Function +24 V power supply

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 +24 V-1
2 +24 V-2
3 0V
4 0V

Connector DCN5 (MOLEX 5566-14A)

Function +24 V system drive

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 +24 V
2 +EXHAUST FAN
3 +24 V
4 +COOLING FAN
5 +24 V
6 +PUMP COOLING FAN
7 +CONVEYOR MOTOR
8 - CONVEYOR MOTOR
9 +SORTER MOTOR
10 - SORTER MOTOR
11 SP2+ (Spare)
12 SP2- (Spare)
13 +5 V
14 +BZ

£-91 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Connector DCN6 (MOLEX 5281-02A)

Function 200 VAC power supply

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 N. C.
2 N. C.

Connector DCN7 (MOLEX 5566-06A)

Function 100 VAC power supply

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 100 VAC ø1
2 100 VAC ø1
3 N. C.
4 100 VAC ø2
5 100 VAC ø2
6 N. C.

Connector DCN8 (JMOLEX 5566-04A)

Function 100 VAC system drive

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 P1 CIRCULATION PUMP
2 100 VAC ø2
3 FG
4 N. C.

Connector DCN9 (MOLEX 5566-04A)

Function 100 VAC system drive

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 P2 CIRCULATION PUMP
2 100 VAC ø2
3 FG
4 N. C.

Connector DCN10 (MOLEX 5566-04A)

Function 100 VAC system drive

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 P3-1 CIRCULATION PUMP


2 100 VAC ø2
3 FG
4 N. C.

£-92 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Connector DCN11 (MOLEX 5566-04A)

Function 100 VAC system drive

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 P3-2 CIRCULATION PUMP


2 100 VAC ø2
3 FG
4 N. C.

Connector DCN12 (MOLEX 5566-04A)

Function 100 VAC system drive

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 P3-3 CIRCULATION PUMP


2 100 VAC ø2
3 FG
4 N. C.

Connector DCN13 (MOLEX 5566-04A)

Function 100 VAC system drive

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 SQA type: P1 REPL. PUMP / J type: Water pump


2 100 VAC ø2
3 FG
4 N. C.

Connector DCN14 (MOLEX 5566-04A)

Function 100 VAC system drive

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 SQA type: P2 REPL. PUMP / J type: Water pump


2 100 VAC ø2
3 FG
4 N. C.

Connector DCN15 (MOLEX 5566-04A)

Function 100 VAC system drive

No. Pin assignment Remark

1 SQA type: P3 REPL. PUMP / J type: Water pump


2 100 VAC ø2
3 FG
4 N. C.

£-93 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. LEDs

LED Designation Description Remark

LED1 P1CPUMP Lights up when P1 circulation pump starts operating.


LED2 P2CPUMP Lights up when P2 circulation pump starts operating.
LED3 P3CPUMP Lights up when P3 circulation pump starts operating.
LED4 P1REPL. SQA type: Lights up when P1 repl. pump starts operating, J type: Water pump
LED5 P2REPL. SQA type: Lights up when P2 repl. pump starts operating, J type: Water pump
LED6 P3REPL. SQA type: Lights up when P3 repl. pump starts operating, J type: Water pump
LED7 OVRPUMP Lights up when the overflow transfer pump starts running. Used on J type of CE machine.
LED8 SP1 Spare
LED9 P1H Lights up when P1 heater starts operating.
LED10 P2H Lights up when P2 heater starts operating.
LED11 DRFAN, CLFAN Lights up when the dryer fan and cooling fan start operating.
LED12 P3H Lights up when P3 heater is in operation.
LED13 DRYH1 Lights up when DRY heater 1 starts operating.
LED14 DRYH2 Lights up when DRY heater 2 starts operating.
LED17 PCFAN Lights up when the pump cooling fan starts operating.
LED18 EXFAN Lights up when the exhaust fan start operating.
LED19 SP2 Spare
LED26 SP5 Spare
LED27 SP6 Spare
LED28 SP7 Spare
LED29 24 V-1 For 24 V power supply operation confirmation.

5. Buzzer sound (VR1) adjustment

When buzzer cannot be heard, correct the VR1 to the proper position, with the buzzer being ready for
sounding by use of the test mode, etc.

Fuses (PROCESSOR-DRIVE Board)

The fuses used are listed in the following tables.


Using fuses of different type and rating may damage the units due to overload or shortcircuit.

No. Model Manufacturer Rating Load

F1 2183.15 Ritel Fuse 250 V, 3.15 A P1&P2 circulation pumps

F2 2183.15 Ritel Fuse 250 V, 3.15 A P3 circulation pumps

F3 2183.15 Ritel Fuse 250 V, 3.15 A P1 to P3 repl. pumps

£-94 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

4-1. BLOCK DIAGRAM


●DS-1000U/DS-100T/DS-1000 HARDWARE BLOCK DIAGRAM

¢-1 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
●DP-1000E/DP-1000 HARDWARE BLOCK DIAGRAM

¢-2 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4-2. WIRING DIAGRAM
●DS-1000/DS-1000U (1/2)

¢-3 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
●DS-1000/DS-1000U (2/2)

¢-4 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
●DS-1000T (1/2)

¢-5 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
●DS-1000T (2/2)

¢-6 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
●240AFC

¢-7 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
●UNIVERSAL CARRIER

¢-8 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
●PRINTER (1/6)

¢-9 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
●PRINTER (2/6)

¢-10 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
●PRINTER (3/6)

¢-11 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
●PRINTER (4/6)

¢-12 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
●PRINTER (5/6)

¢-13 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
●PRINTER (6/6)

¢-14 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
5. EXPLANATION OF POWER SUPPLY UNIT
5-1. Input station
SUP1 SUP2

Type LEB225F-0524-SYN LDA15F-15SN

Maker COSEL COSEL

Function 5V 24V 15V

・CCD unit control ( logical) ・CCD unit drive ・CCD unit analogue section
・ AFC-CPU board control ( logical) ・Motor ( transport, APS cartridge) ・Film carrier film sensor
・ Scanner drive board control ・ Solenoid ( LLD,F/P) ・Film carrier APS magnetic detection
(logical) ・ Clutch
・ Power supply for sensors ( photo ・ LED light source
interrupter, micro sw) ・ Cooling fan

5-2. Printer Processor


SUP1 SUP2 SUP3 SUP4 SUP5

Type LEA50F-5-RY LEA50F-3R3-RY LEB225F-0524-R LDA30F-12 LEA100F-24-H

Maker COSEL COSEL COSEL COSEL COSEL

Function 5V(5V-1) 3.3V 5V(5V-2) 24V(24V-1) 12V 24V(24V-2)

[Remote control [Remote control ・HEAD-BUF board [Remote control Creating 36V with Creating 36V with
function] function] control function] SUP5(24V) SUP4(12V)
・PRINTER-CPU board
・Sub-drive unit control ・Power supply of LED control ・Motor power supply at ・Paper processor drive 36V:
・Exposure transport exposure head ・Power supply board of Sub-drive unit motor ・Paper processor drive
section control VFPH ・Motor power supply at ・Double magazine motor
・Paper feed unit ・PROCESSOR CPU Exposure transport motor ・Double magazine
control board control section motor
・Double magazine ・Motor power supply at 24V:
control Paper feed unit ・DC motor power
・Motor power supply at supply at Paper
double magazine processor
・Exhaust fan, vacuum
fan

∞-1 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
5-3. SUP1: Check procedures against a case where 5-volt power is not output

SUP is a power supply provided with a remote-control function.


Even if 5-volt power is not output from SUP1, it does not necessarily indicate a failure.
Be sure to troubleshoot by the steps shown in the following flow:

1 Turn on the breaker. Start

Check output of YES


2 Check that 5-volt output appears across
Normal
CN2-3, 4 (+) and 1,2 (-) on SUP1. SUP power
supply.

NO

YES Fault such as short-circuit


3 3. Turn off the breaker, and remove CN2 from Check output with caused by overloading is
SUP1. Turn on the breaker, and check connector open. suspected.
that 5-volt output appears across CN2-3, 4 (+)
Check wiring.
and 1,2 (-) on SUP1 with the connector open.
NO

4 Turn off the breaker, and connect CN2 on Check remote YES
Fault of power supply is
SUP1. Turn on the breaker, and check control signal (1).
suspected.
that 5-volt output appears across CN3-1 (+)
and 2 (-) on SUP1.
NO 1 Harness between PPCN 11
on Printer-CPU board and
PSCN6 on power supply
unit and power supply unit
5 Check that 5-volt output appears across Check remote YES on PRINTER-CPU board.
2 Harness between PSCN8
CN(+) to 6 (-) on PPCN11-2 of PRINTER-CPU control signal (2). and AUP1-3 in power
board. supply unit.
Faulty harness or
NO disconnection of connector in
one of the above is suspected.

YES Fault of PRINTER-CPU board is


6 Check that 5-volt DC output appears on Input on PRINTER- suspected. Replace the board
PPCN11-2 of PRINTER, across TP1 (5V) and CPU board. with new one.
TP2 (GND).

NO

5-volt power is not output


from SUP3 power supply.
Check SUP3 or cables
coming from SUP3.
Replace SUP3 or the cables
if necessary.

End

Note

・ Note: Reference voltage: 5V, plus or minus 0.25V Go to "Yes" if a voltage is within the range.
Go to "No" if a voltage is range.

∞-2 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF INPUT SECTION (DS-1000U/T)

IMPORTANT:
• Turn off all power sources.
• When unplugging the power cord, make sure that the power has been
completely turned off, and remove the plug from the socket by pulling on the
plug connector section, not the power cable. (Use the same method for
plugging in the unit)
• Before removing circuit boards, switches or sensors in the system, discharge
static electricity from your body by touching other metal part of the system.
• When adjusting a board or a replacing a power supply unit, use a ceramic
screwdriver. Do not use a metal screwdriver.

6-1. Air filter

6-1-1. Cleaning air filter (Monthly operation)

1 Remove air filters a and b (two sections each of air intake and exhaust) of the light source
section and remove also the side c of the film scanner main unit.
2 Wash the removed air filters in water, dry them completely, and then install them.

NOTE

- Install the right and left air filters of the light source section b with the coarsely meshed side
outward.

a
b
a

c
b

§-1 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6-2. Light source

6-2-1. Cleaning dichroic mirror (Every three month)

1 Open the front cover at the lower part of Film


1
Scanner.

2 Completely loosen both 1. Pull the green


handle forward, and guide the light source by
hand when removing.

3 Loosen 2.
Rotate 3 90.
Completely loosen both 4.
Push the light source cover a inwards and
remove it.

2 Diffusion film (upper)


NOTE 3

- Be careful for the diffusion film (upper) not to a


slip down in removing the lamp unit cover.

4 Loosen 5. 4
Slide 6 in the "FREE" direction.
Pull 7 diagonally upwards and remove it.

5 Wipe the dichroic mirror b with a dry soft lint


free cloth.
6

NOTE
7
• Use of water or alcohol when cleaning may
result in spotting. This will adversely affect
image quality.

6 Install the removed components exactly as 5


before.

§-2 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6-2-2. Replacing diffusion film (upper) (Replace it as needed)

1 Open the font cover at the lower part of Film


1
Scanner.

2 Completely loosen both screw 1.


Pull the green handle forward, and guide the
light source by hand when removing.

3 Loosen screw 2.
Turn 3 90°, and remove the dispersion film a.

4 Insert the new dispersion film with the cut side


facing left (smooth side facing up).

5 Install the removed components exactly as 2


before. 3

NOTE Insert direction


Cut side
- Set the diffusion film with its notch
being fit to the notch on the
mounting side.
(The diffusion film should be
placed with the smooth surface
Cut side
upward.)
a

Diffusion film

Remove direction

§-3 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6-2-3. Cleaning diffusion film (lower) (Monthly operation)

1 Remove the lamp unit cover according to steps


1 through 3 of the procedure explained in "6- b
2-1. Cleaning dichroic mirror."

2 Remove two screws a and remove light-guide


assembly b. a

3 Remove two screws c of light guide assembly, c


and remove lower cover d.

NOTE

- Keep it clean and do not drop since a prism


is incorporated in the unit.

4 Remove the diffusion film (lower) e, clean it


with the dry cloth specified by Konica, or
replace it as needed.

5 Install the removed components exactly as


d
before.

NOTE

- Fit the notch in the diffusion film to the notch


in the lower cover.
(The diffusion film should be placed with the
rough surface upward.)
Cut side

Diffusion film

Cut side

Lower cover d

§-4 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6-2-4 Replacing LS-LED B and LS-LED A boards

Spacer
POINT

- A warning message is displayed when LED


needs to be replaced because the light is
dim. Replace the LED when the warning
message is displayed. Clean the LED Bottom side : LS-LED B board (Red, Green, Ir)
surface with a blower brush, or the like every
6 months (rough standard) until the message
is displayed.

IMPORTANT
Side: LS-LED A board. (Blue)
- After replacing LS-LED A/B board, perform the
setup with all film carriers being selected.

[Replacing LS-LED B board]

1 Remove the dichroic mirror according to steps


1 through 4 of the procedure explained in "6-
2-1. Cleaning dichroic mirror."
Remove the light guide assembly according to
steps 1 and 2 of the procedure explained in
"6-2-3. Cleaning diffusion film (lower)."

2 Remove screws a on side of light source (one b a


on left and right each, two screws in total), and
then remove cover b.
c
3 Remove the two screws c from the bottom of
the lamp unit, and remove the LS-LED board B
d together with the base bracket.

4 Remove connector (LSCN 2) e that is


connected to the board.

5 Remove the four screws f to remove the LS-


LED board B from the base bracket, and
replace the LS-LED board. e

NOTE d

- A spacer is placed between the base bracket


and the LS-LED board. Be careful not to drop
or lose the spacer.

6 Install the removed components exactly as


before. f

IMPORTANT

- Note that LS-LED B can be mounted upside down, which is wrong orientation.
- When installing the LS-LED board B, left-adjust it in the state in which the stamp on it is at the
normal position (with the connector on the front), and secure it.

§-5 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
[Replacing LS-LED A board]

1 Remove the dichroic mirror according to steps


1 through 4 of the procedure explained in "6-
2-1. Cleaning dichroic mirror."
Remove the light guide assembly according to
steps 1 and 2 of the procedure explained in
"6-2-3. Cleaning diffusion film (lower)." g

2 Like when replacing the LS-LED board B,


remove the two screws g from the bottom of
the lamp unit, and remove the LS-LED board A
h together with the base bracket.

3 Remove connector (LSCN 1) that is connected


to the board.

4 Remove four screws, and then remove LS-LED


A board to replace the component.

NOTE
h
- A spacer is placed between the base bracket
and the LS-LED board. Be careful not to
drop or lose the spacer.

5 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

NOTE

- Make sure of the orientation of the LS-LED board when installing it on the base bracket.
(Be careful that the board can be installed upside-down from the correct orientation.)

§-6 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6-3. Film Scanner

[Preparation]
1. Remove the AFC and 135 film stocker from the film scanner.
2. Remove the film scanner from the table, and place it on a level, hard table.

6-3-1. Replacing scanning section

(Required tools)
Stabilized screwdriver, general Phillips screwdriver, and long Phillips screwdriver

NOTE

- Shut down the input station, turn off the film scanner, disconnect the AC cord and wiring, and
then start the operation below.

1 Remove screw a (M4 x 14 SEMS 2, one


screw) under the front cover and remove the
b
front cover b.
(Tool: Stabilized screwdriver)

2 Remove six screws c (Truss M4 x 8). Remove the right top cover by lifting the bottom.

c
c

§-7 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3 Remove six screws d (Truss M4 x 8). Remove the left top cover.

4 Remove connectors e (J1, J4, IEEE1394) at


the rear of scanning section. e

§-8 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
5 Replace image capture unit by following steps.
(1) Remove three screws f.
(2) Disconnect the connector JP11 g.
(3) Slowly lift and pull out the image capture
unit straight.

NOTE

- In case of shims (spacers) are on screw hole, A


be careful not to drop or lose any of them in
lifting the image pickup unit. f k
(4) Place the shims (spacers) one on top of
another neatly on the corresponding screw
hole. (The same number of shims must be
placed on the same screw hole as before.)
(5) Take out the new image pickup unit, and
remove the silica gel that is taped on it. f
* Hold the flange (where the mounting
screws exist) of the image capture unit
when taking it out.
(6) Securely set the new image capture unit
while paying attention to the positioning g h
pins h.
(7) Tighten the screws you removed in (1).

NOTE

- Notes on handling the image capture unit:


Keep the following in mind when placing the image capture unit alone: In consideration of the
breakage prevention and safety of the lens and filter, put the image capture unit on a level place
with the surface A (indicated in the above figure) downward. Do not touch the lens. Do not give
shock to the image capture unit.

(8) Connect the connectors (J1, J4, IEEE1394, and J11).


The connector IEEE1394 must be connected to J6 (upper).
(9) Turn on the power and perform adjustment, following the image scanner replacement
procedures given in the next pages onward.

6 Installing the covers and placing the film scanner


(1) Install the upper left cover with the six screws (Truss M4 x 8) .
(2) Install the upper right cover with the six screws (Truss M4 x 8) .
(3) Install the front cover with the screw (M4 x 14 SEMS 2) .
(4) Place the film scanner on the system table, and align their surfaces with each other.
(5) Install the AFC and 135 film stocker.
(6) Wire the image capture unit exactly as before you removed, and then turn on the power.

IMPORTANT

- When replacing the image capture unit, confirm the versions of the film scanner and the zoom
lens, and update them to the latest versions as needed.

§-9 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
■ Procedures of replacing image scanning sections

●List of adjustment items upon replacement of image scanning section

No. Description Tool used Page number Remarks


【1】 Updating film scanner driver §-10
【2】 Adjusting scanner focus PPCS §-11 *1
【3】 S/N number check list Unit number check sheet §-13
【4】 Light source unit check ScantestRD1.exe(120-compatible) §-15 *1
【5】 Main scanning position check §-20 *2
Sub scanning direction optical Check chart film and analysis, Analysis
【6】 §-23 *3
axis check software setup file, Software (gst_chk_old.exe)
*1: Some procedures are required only when UFC is used.
*2: Required when 135AFC, 240AFC (option), UFC (option) are used.
*3: Required only when UFC is used.

●Detailed procedures

【1】
】 Updating film scanner driver

Administrator’s log-in is required for the procedures.


<Procedures>
1) Press [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Del] keys to display "Windows security" screen.
2) Press "Log off."
3) On the log-on screen, enter the following information:
User name: Administrator
Password: blank
Then press "OK"

1 Right-click on "My Computer" icon of desktop to open "Property."


2 Click "Device Manager" in "Hardware" tab.
3 Click "+" symbol on "DRS Protocol Device" tree to display "MFS Film Scanner."
4 Open property of "MFS Film Scanner."
5 Click "Update Driver" button on "Driver" tab.
6 On a dialog, click "Next."
7 Select "Display a list of the known drivers for this device so that I can choose a specific
driver"and click "Next."
8 Click "Have Disk" button.
9 Click "Browse" and select:
C:¥Program Files¥rsystem¥r1¥vup¥RSCAN¥DRIVER¥MFS.inf
Then click "Open" and "OK."
!0 Click "Next."
!1 "Start installation" is displayed. Click "Next."
!2 Click "Finish."
!3 After finishing, open property of "MFS Film Scanner," and click "Driver" tab. Verify that
its version number is "0.21.2.0" or 1.0.0.0."

The following procedures are all applicable to r1 user.


Log out of the system and then log in as r1 again.
User name: r1
Password: konica
(Phoenix automatically starts up and displays home screen.)

§-10 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
【2】
】 Scanner focus adjustment procedures

[Required tool]
PPCS negative film (a frame of under exposure is used)
Perform scanner focus adjustment using a negative film.
Use a negative film free from strong curl, severe damages, or buckling.

(1) On 135AFC / 240AFC


1 Mount a carrier to set up.
2 Select Home → Maintenance → 22.Film scanner → 222.adjust focus.
3 From underneath insert a slope scanning PPCS negative film for height adjustment.
Pre-scanning is automatically executed and the first several frames are displayed on
screen.
4 Select darkest density image and drag the image scanning position setting line (yellow
vertical line) to left or right, so that the line comes at the center of a figure in PPCS.

carrier type

mask type discharge register auto start

5 Pressing "auto start" button starts automatic adjustment of focus position.


Upon completion of calculation, the value appears in "New height adjustment value" field.
6 Press "regist" button to register, and eject film with the "discharge" button.

§-11 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
(2) On Universal carrier (Perform only when Universal carrier is used).
1 Mount a mask for Universal carrier to be adjusted.
- The focus adjustment mode adjusts focus for each carrier and each mask type.
However, 120 masks including 6-by-6 and 6-by-7 are all recognized as 120 masks.
Register only one mask for 120 mask of the shop.
On the UFC focus adjustment screen, the software detects 5 types of masks, 135, 110,
120, 240, and mount.
- Adjust the mount mask using a typical mount. Focus adjustment is allowed by clicking
"AF Ctl" button that appears upon setting a mount mask.
2 Select Home → Maintenance → 22.Film scanner → 222.adjust focus
3 Press "Move to home" button to detect a mask type. Check that a mask type specified
in "Mask type".
4 Set a film for scanner focus adjustment(PPCS) and execute pre-scanning with
"Pre scanning" button.
5 Drag the image scanning position setting line (yellow vertical line) to left or right so that the
line comes at the center of a figure in PPCS.
6 Pressing "auto start" button starts automatic adjustment of focus position.
Upon completion of calculation, the value appears in "New height adjustment value" field.
7 Press "regist" button to register, and then take out the film.

pre scanning

auto start

regist

move to home

§-12 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
【3】
】 S/N number check list

Check and record the items that were modified.

<Unit number check sheet> Machine number: ( )

(1) Input station unit

Serial number
No. Unit name
Early Replace 1 Replace 2
Main unit
1 Image scanning section
2 AFC-CPU Board
3 DC-TRM Board
4 ScannerDriving Board
Power supply unit
1 SUP1
2 SUP2
Light source unit
1 Light source unit
2 LS-LED-A Board
3 LS-LED-B Board
PC unit
1 PC unit
2 Extended keyboard
3 Flatbed scanner
4 HUB
5 CRT
Other
1 Film cleaner

§-13 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
(2) 135AFC

Serial number
No. Unit name
Early Replace 1 Replace 2
135AFC
1 135 AFC unit
2 PD-AMP Board

(3) 240AFC

Serial number
No. Unit name
Early Replace 1 Replace 2
240AFC
1 240AFC unit
2 PD-AMP Board
3 MAG-AMP Board

(3) Universal carrier

Serial number
No. Unit name
Early Replace 1 Replace 2
Universal carrier
1 Universal carrier

§-14 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
【4】
】 Checking light source unit

(1) Measuring light-source output


By the following procedures, perform automatic light adjustment and record the light
adjustment value.
1 Mount 135AFC on the scanner unit.
2 Select "Maintenance" - "21 film carrier" - "213 Set light source" and press [Morning setup].
Then press [Start] to start processing.
3 After completion of the morning setup, click [Quit].
4 Press [Previous] to close the current screen. Then press [213 Set light source] again to
activate the light-source setting mode.
5 Click [Light source setting] - [Scan] to display graph.
6 Adjust PWMB values so that MAX displays for B, G, R, and IR are 57000 (87%) to 61000
(93%). (If adjustment is impossible, specify 0 ->1 for PWMA.) Repeat pressing [Set light
source] and [Scan] to display graph.

Guideline for adjustment


- Setting range of PWMB is 0 to 255. Setting values and signal levels are in a direct
proportional relationship.
- Setting range of PWMA is 0 to 1. PWMA=1 specifies a level twice as high as a level at
PWMA=0.
That is: Signal levels change in proportion to ([PWMA setting value] + 1) x [PWMB setting
value].
- First, set PWMA=0 and perform adjustment by PWMB values as much as possible.
Example: Increase PWMB by 10% to increase MAX value by 10%.
- If a signal level is insufficient at PWMB=255, set PWMA=1.
Example: To increase signal level by 30% at PWMA=0/PWMB=220, specify
PWMA=1/PWMB=143 (calculated as: 220 x 1.3 = 286 = 2 x 143).
- If a desired level is not obtained at PWMA=1 and PWMB=255, collect data at PWMA=1
and PWMB=255 and record a maximum value under that setting.
- If the light source is saturated (State where the graph forms a straight line at 100%),
saturation level is unknown. Specify PWMB at 1/2 temporarily.

7 Record PWMA and PWMB values after light adjustment.


B G R IR
Measurement PWM A 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1
value (entry) PWM B

5
7

2
6

8 Click "Home" to return to the home screen. Do not click "Registraion."

§-15 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
(2) Measuring flatness (only when mask for 120 is used on UFC)
Quit R1 application (Phenix.exe) if it has been activated.
The mask for 120 mounted, load UFC on the film scanner.
Insert a specified floppy disk, and activate ScantestRD1.exe in the ScantestRD1_120 folder.

1 2 4

1 Press [Init].
2 Press [Connect].
3 Select size 6*4.5H and press [Setup].
4 Select Is zero.
5 Press [Control]. Enters Lamp Control screen.

After the commands are issued, status display such as "XXX OK" appears at the upper-left
corner of the window.
If a display such as "XXX Failure" appears, select Disconnect → Exit → Quit to close the
software and press the reset button (a white button in the hole located at the bottom-right corner
on the front panel of the image scanner), or turn off and on the power of the scanner. Then restart
the process with activation of ScantestRD1.EXE.

§-16 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6 Select Blue and verify that data is set as: DAC1: 3, DAC2: 63, DAC3: 31, DAC4 (all of
DAC4-1 through 16): 63, PWMCLK:36, PWM BLANK:1.
Set the results of automatic light adjustment (PWMA and PWMB) in PWMALL and PWM.
(PWMALL ← PWMA、PWM ← PWMB)
7 Similarly for G/R/IR, verify that data is set as: DAC1: 3, DAC2: 63, DAC3: 31, DAC4 (all of
DAC4-1 through 16): 63, PWMCLK: 36, PWM BLANK: 1. Set the result of automatic light
adjustment (PWMA and PWMB) in PWMALL and PWM. (PWMALL ← PWMA、
PWM ←PWMB)
Select [OK] to turn on the LED of light source. (LED is turned on after corrected data is
written on FD.)
8 The system returns to the Scantest for RD1 screen. Verify that [Shutter] button is pressed
down. If it is not pressed down, press [Shutter] button.

A pressed-down [Shutter] button indicates that the Shutter is open. Otherwise, output
cannot be verified. An open shutter allows continuous light to CCD, causing degradation
of CCD. Avoid long interruption of operation under this condition.

9 Press [Graph] to open Lamp level map screen.

§-17 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
100%
80%
60%
40%
20%
0%
!0
Air PWM (37h)

Air area

!0 Press[Scan]. Verify that the maximum values for R, G, and B are approximately 90%
to 80%. If the light is saturating (State where the graph forms a straight line at 100%) or
below 80%, adjust Pwm B and Pwm A values of
applicable channels for Lamp level map Air area, press [Air PWM(37h)], and then press
[Scan] again. (Repeat the process until a maximum value becomes 90 to 80%.

Guideline for adjustment


- Setting range of PWMB is 0 to 255. Setting values and signal levels are in a direct
proportional relationship.
- Setting range of PWMA is 0 to 1. PWMA=1 specifies a level twice as high as a level at
PWMA=0.
That is: Signal levels change in proportion to ([PWMA setting value] + 1) x [PWMB setting
value].
- First, set PWMA=0 and perform adjustment by PWMB values as much as possible.
Example: Increase PWMB by 10% to increase MAX value by 10%.
- If a signal level is insufficient at PWMB=255, set PWMA=1.
Example: To increase signal level by 30% at PWMA=0/PWMB=220, specify
PWMA=1/PWMB=143 (calculated as: 220 x 1.3 = 286 = 2 x 143).
- If a desired level is not obtained at PWMA=1 and PWMB=255, collect data at PWMA=1
and PWMB=255 and record a maximum value under that setting.
- If the light source is saturated (State where the graph forms a straight line at 100%) ,
saturation level is unknown. Specify PWMB at 1/2 temporarily.

§-18 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
!1 The graph initially displays RGB only. For IR, therefore, verification is required also (select
IR).
!2 Press [????] to close Lamp level map to return to main screen.
!3 Press [Create] to scan profile data of light source.
!4 Press [Save] to save data. File name is yymmdd_SN(.shd), and saving destination is a
floppy disk.
"yymmdd" is a current date and SN is a serial number of the film scanner.
!5 Select[DISCONNECT]→[EXIT]→[QUIT]to terminate ScanTsetRD1.

§-19 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
【5】Film Scanner Scanning Position Adjustment (Main Direction)

When the image capture unit is replaced to new one, the scanning position adjustment is taken
during the replacement.
All film carriers are adjusted individually.

Do not change the scanning condition values because values are set at the factory.

(1) Preparation: Film scanner setup


From Home: "Setup" − "12 Individual Setting" − "122 Film scanner setup"
Before scanner position adjustment, the film scanner setup is taken for all film carriers.
(2) Scanner position adjustment procedure
1 Set film carrier to film scanner
Note; Take out any filmstrip in the carrier
Note; In case of UFC, proceed below procedure too
a) Set UFC with 135 film mask to film scanner and click "Film mask initialize".
b) Click "Yes", when the message comes on the screen.
c) Move the center of the mask to scanning position after the mask is back to home
position.
2 From Home "Maintenance" − "21 Film Carrier" − "213 Set light source"
3 Click "Main Scan Calculation"

"Main Scan Calculation" button

§-20 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
If scanning condition is different form below table, change the value to initial value and
click "Set".

Item Initial Value


Zoom No. 86
Threshold Value 0.60
Main Scanning Pixel 5340
Sub Scanning Pixel 500

4 Click "Calculation"
Try 2 or 3 times up to the lines are flat in the graph.

"Calculation" button

"Registration" button

5 Click "Registration".
6 Click "Home".
7 Confirmation of Registration
From Home "Maintenance" − "21 Film Carrier"− "211 Set feed"
Confirm the main scanning shifts value.

Main scanning shifts value

8 Click "Home".

§-21 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
【6】Checking the optical axis in the sub-scan direction (only when UFC is used)

1. Purpose
The purpose of this checking is to match the optical axes of the projection section so that the
occurrence of ghosting is reduced.

2. Items to be prepared
Universal carrier (UFC), 135 film mask (for UFC)
Inspection chart film
Floppy disk (FD) containing data analysis software (gst_chk.exe)
Check sheet (calculation sheet)

3. Outline of the procedure

Prepare carrier

Clean main unit and film carrier (3 minutes)

Set up scanner (4 minutes)

Project inspection chart film


(set reversal film)

Set 6 x 8 (2 minutes)

Judge with data analysis software End if OK

Adjust using shims if NG (5 minutes)

4. Details of the procedure


1 Preparing a universal carrier (UFC)
Prepare UFC and a 135-film mask and set it in the scanner main unit.

2 Cleaning the main unit and carrier


Clean the top of the light source diffusion panel of the input section and the slit section of
the UFC with a blower brush.

3 Setting up a scanner
After starting Phenix.exe, select [Setup]→[12 Individual setup]→[122 Film scanner setup]
from the home screen. Check "UFC" in the carrier used field and click on [Start setup].
Setup takes about 2 to 3 minutes.

§-22 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4 Projecting an inspection chart
4-1 Specify 'positive' for the film type and '6 x 8' for the print size.
Click "No Print" button..
4-2 Increment the Sort No. by one and record the Sort No. Set the inspection chart film in
the 135-film mask and scan the film.
(Images of inspection film are all the same. Do not use the heavy curled film or the
scratched image.)
4-3 Click "Print" button.

5 Analyzing data and adjusting the projection section by inserting shims

For adjustment, shim (spacer) is required separately.


270001062B Spacer (0.1 mm)
270001070A Spacer (0.2 mm)
270001071A Spacer (0.5 mm)

5-1 Set the FD containing analysis software in the PC. Check that the FD contains
(A:¥ )gst_chk.exe and gst_chk.txt.

5-2 Double-click on gst_chk.exe from FD drive (A:¥ ).

5-2 5-1

5-3 A command prompt screen is opened and input of Year, Month, and Date is
prompted. If the current date displayed in the parentheses is correct, press Enter.
When the date displayed is incorrect, enter the current date.
Enter the Sort No. from the command prompt screen as shown below.

5-3 Enter the year using four digits. (If the displayed year is correct, press
Enter.)
Enter a month (1 to 12). (If the displayed month is correct, press Enter.)
Enter a day (1 to 31) (If the displayed day is correct, press Enter.)

§-23 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
5-4 Enter "1" for Print No. and press the Enter key.

5-5 Enter, in the check sheet, the evaluation values that are displayed in the order of R,
G, and B on the Left and Right columns.
If all the values are within the standard <<±10 or less>>, end the session. When
"If you type any key, exit this program" is displayed on the command prompt
screen, close the screen by pressing any key.
After ending the session, remove the FD from the FD drive.
5-4 5-5

When the values are outside of the standard value <<±10 or less>>, adjust the shims in
the three sections of the projection section installation section. (In this case, follow the
instruction described in the procedure for replacing the projection section (6-3-1.
Replacing scanning section) for mounting and removing the projection section.)
Determine the adjustment size based on the only one with largest absolute evaluation
value among those of R, G, and B.

Code of evaluation value


(Those whose values are the Processing of shim
maximum)
Insert a shim of the adjustment size in each of the two
Left is a positive value and sections on the Right-hand side or if it can be removed,
Right is a negative value remove the shim of the adjustment size from the left-
hand side.
Insert a shim of the adjustment size in the left-hand side
Left is a negative value and or if it can be removed, remove the shim of the
Right is a positive value adjustment size from each of the two sections on the
right-hand side.

Shim adjustment value: Number of shims (0.1mm in thickness)=( Absolute evaluation value ÷ 5)
* Of the three sections of the projection section installation section, make sure that the same
number of shims are increased or reduced for the two sections on the right-hand side.
The evaluation values indicated above are used for the following example.

Evaluation values <Action to be taken>


Left Right ・ Loosen the three screws that are fixing image capture
unit.
Red 3.104575 −3.104575 ・ Shim adjustment value is calculated at 2, because
Green 10.138659 −10.138659 10.138659 as the largest value is divided 5.
Blue 4.949833 −4.949833 ・ Put two 0.1mm-thick shims (or one 0.2mm-thick- shim)
with the cutouts alignment on two fixing holes at right
side.
・Fasten the three fixing screws.
・Restart from Item (4) Checking the light source unit.

§-24 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6 Final processing
Click "No Print" button again.

Shim size check sheet


Shim size (0.1mm units) Evaluation value (Left) Shim adjustment size (0.1mm units)
Sort Left Right
Right No.
Left Left R G B Add when evaluation Add when evaluation
front
when value Left) is <-5 value (Left) is >5
Initial
After 1st
adjustment
After 2nd
adjustment
After 3rd
adjustment
After 4th
adjustment
After 5th
adjustment

Check that no floppy disk remains in the PC and end the adjustment work.
Return to the procedure for replacement of the projection section and start installation of the cover.

§-25 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6-3-2. Replacing driving speed changer

[Preparation]
1. Remove the AFC and 135 film stocker from the film scanner.
2. Remove the film scanner from the table, and place it on a level, hard table.

(Required tools)
Stabilized screwdriver, general Phillips screwdriver, and long Phillips screwdriver
(WYNN: Multi-purpose grease)

1 Following the steps 1 thorough 3 in [6-3-1. Replacing scanning section], remove front cover,
upper cover (right), and upper cover (left) of the film scanner.

2 Remove the two screws a (M4 x 12 SEMS 2) that secure the driving unit cover b, and remove
the cover slanting it forward.
(Tool: Phillips screwdriver)

<Top view of film scanner (Left side)> <Top view of film scanner (Right side)>

a
a

§-26 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3 Disconnect the connectors.
Driving speed changer: 4 connectors (motor
c, JP7 d, JP8 e, and JP9 f)

d c
e f

4 Image capture unit: 1 connector


Disconnect IEEE1394. Remove the screw h
h
from the cord retainer g, and remove the cord
retainer and then the cord bush i. g
Remove the two screws k from the wiring
support j, turn it with the IEEE1394 l cable i kl
to the rear, and take them away from the top of
the driving speed change unit.
j

5 3. Remove the four screws m (M4 x 12 SEMS


2) that secure the driving speed change unit.
(Tool: Long Phillips screwdriver)

§-27 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6 4. Remove the four screws n (Truss M4 x 8)
that secure the rear cover, and loosen the
three screws o.
(Tool: Phillips screwdriver)

7 Remove the driving speed change unit from


the main unit. Be careful not to catch the wiring
in removing it.
n
POINT

• The driving speed changer is tightly secured


for maintaining the precision of the
positioning control axis.

8 Secure the driving speed changer to the input


unit with the four screws (M4 x 8 SEMS 2).
(Basically, install it in reverse order (7 to 2) of
the removal steps.

NOTE

• When mounting a new driver gearbox, fit the


pin at the receptor for fastening.
(Tool: Long Phillips screwdriver)

9 Secure the rear cover with the four screws (Truss M4 x 8) you removed and the three screws you
loosened in step 6.

!0 Connect the connectors you disconnected in III-2. (Refer to step 4 and 3).
Install the wiring support (2 screws), the cord bush, and the cord retainer (1 screw), and then
connect the connector (IEEE1394) to the image capture unit and the four connectors (motor, JP7,
JP8, and JP9) to the driving speed changer.

!1 Secure the driving unit cover with the two screws (M4 x 8 Semusu II) you removed in step 2 .

§-28 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
!2 Re-mount the covers, etc. that were removed in step 1, and install the film scanner.
(1) Install the upper left cover with the six screws (Truss M4 x 8).
(2) Install the upper right cover with the six screws (Truss M4 x 8).
(3) Install the front cover with the screw (M4 x 14 SEMS 2).
(Tool: Stabilized screwdriver)
(4) Apply multi-purpose grease to the positioning control axis.

POINT

- If you do not apply grease on it, the lifetime is extremely shorten.

Recommended grease manufacturer: Wynn OIL COMPANY (U.S.A.)


Product name: Wynn's E.P. Multi-Purpose Grease No. 2

Apply grease here.

(5) Place the film scanner on the system table, and align their surfaces with each other.
(6) Install the AFC and 135 film stocker.
(7) Wire the image capture unit exactly as before you removed, and then turn on the power.

6-3-3. Check dirt on drive gears

1 Check dirt on the position regulating axis of the drive gears.

2 If dirt is found (axis looks black or dust is found on grease), wipe off the old grease using a
specified dry, soft, lint-free cloth.

3 Apply multi-purpose grease to the position regulating axis.

Apply grease here.

Recommended grease manufacturer: Wynn OIL COMPANY (U.S.A.)


Product name: Wynn's E.P. Multi-Purpose Grease No. 2

Remove and mount the carriers once or twice to make grease conform to the position regulating
axis.

§-29 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6-3-4. Replacing scanner driver board

(Required tools)
Stabilized screwdriver, general Phillips screwdriver, long Phillips screwdriver,
precision driver (for adjusting power VR), and multimeter (which can read two decimal places in
measuring voltage)

1 Following the steps 1 thorough 3 in [6-3-1.


Replacing scanning section], remove front
cover, right top cover, and left top cover of the
film scanner.

2 Remove the driving speed changer according


to the procedure explained in "6-3-2. Replacing
driving speed changer."

3 Replacing the scanner driving board a


Remove the three connectors (CN600, CN601,
and non-numbered one) from the board. a
Remove the two screws b, and remove the
board together with the driver-mounting plate.
Remove the locking supports, and replace the
scanner driving board a.

4 Install the removed components exactly as


before. b

§-30 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6-3-5. Replacing power supply

1 Following the steps 1 thorough 3 in [6-3-1.


Replacing scanning section], remove front a
cover, upper cover (right), right top cover and
left top cover of the film scanner.

2 Remove the connector a (JJ1) from the inside


(below the flywheel of the drive gear section)

3 Disconnect the two connectors b (SUP1- b


CN2 and SUP2-CN2).

4 Remove the earth wire c (one screw)

5 Remove the power supply together with the


seat.
(Loosen screw d (M4 x 14 SEMS 2) and d
remove screw e (M4 x 14 SEMS 2).

POINT

Lift here and pull out the


power supply unit toward you.

§-31 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6 Mount a power supply to replace (with due
attention not to catch wires).

Replacement of SUP1: f
Remove three screws f and the connector g
(SUP1-CN). f
g
Mount SUP1 to replace, and reinstall the
removed parts.

Replacement of SUP2: i
Remove three screws h and the connector i
(SUP2-CN).
Mount SUP2 to replace, and reinstall the h
removed parts. h

7 Install the power supply section in the original


position together with the seat carefully so as
not to catch the cable and fix it with two
screws.

8 Tighten the screws in reverse order of the


removal steps, and connect the connectors
(JJ1, SUP1-CN1, and SUP2-CN2).
Reinstall a grounding terminal.

§-32 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
9 Check for power supply.
When adjusting a board or a replacing a power supply unit, use a ceramic screwdriver.
Do not use a metal screwdriver.
(1) Connect the AC cord, and turn on the film scanner.
(2) 5-2. Adjust the output voltage of SUP1 +5 V.
Tools: Precision screwdriver and multimeter (Those that can be measured up to two decimal
places)
Measure the voltage at TP on the DC-TMR board, and adjust the voltage of the power
supply +5 V with the control of DC power (SUP1).

Power supply
Allowable
to be VR Measuring point Check
range
adjusted
SUP1(+5V1) SUP1 VR DC-TRM board TP3(+5V)-TP4(GND) 4.95∼5.05V

SUP1 VR

(3) Check for voltages.


Tool: Multimeter (Those that can be measured up to two decimal places)
Power supply Measuring point Allowable range Check
+5V1 TP3(+5V)-TP4(GND) 4.95∼5.05V
+15V TP1(+15V)-TP2(AGND) 14.0∼16.0V
+24V TP5(+24V)-TP6(PG) 22.8∼25.2V

(4) After shutting down the input station, turn off the film scanner, and then disconnect the AC
cord.

!0 Re-mount the covers, etc. that were removed in step 1, and install the film scanner.
(1) Install the upper left cover with the six screws (Truss M4 x 8).
(Tool: Phillips screwdriver)
(2) Install the upper right cover with the six screws (Truss M4 x 8).
(Tool: Phillips screwdriver)
(3) Install the front cover with the screw (M4 x 14 SEMS 2).
(Tool: Stabilized screwdriver)
(4) Place the film scanner on the system table, and align their surfaces with each other.
(5) Install the AFC and 135 film stocker.
(6) Wire the image capture unit exactly as before you removed, and then turn on the power.

§-33 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6-3-6. Replacing AFC CPU board/DC TRM board

1 Following the steps 1 thorough 3 in [6-3-1.


Replacing scanning section], remove front a
cover, right top cover, and left top cover of the
film scanner.

2 Replacing the AFC CPU board a and DC


TRM b. b
Remove the connectors from the board.
Remove the six locking supports that secure
the board, and replace the AFC CPU board a
and DC TRM b.

3 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

IMPORTANT

- When replacing the AFC-CPU board, confirm the versions of the AFC and FPGA, and update
the FPGA to the latest version and/or download the AFC device as needed.

6-3-7. Replacing fan

1 Remove the connectors (PSCN9) connected to


the fan. Remove the two hexagonal-head
screws a and replace the fan.

§-34 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6-4. 135AFC

6-4-1. Replacing 135LED board

1 Open the press-fit cover and remove three


screws a. a

2 Remove the press-fit cover b.

3 Remove the two connectors from the board,


remove the three screws c, and replace the
135 board.

4 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

§-35 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6-4-2. Replacing PD-AMP board

1 Remove four screws a and remove the


bottom cover.
a
2 Remove the connectors connected to the
board. Remove two screws b and then
remove the PD-AMP board c to replace.

POINT

- Be careful not to catch the stranded wire.

3 Install the removed components exactly as


before.
c

§-36 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
<Note>
When replacing PD-AMP, the flexible cable is locked even if it is not inserted securely.
After removing the flexible cable, insert the cable securely so that the terminal (silver part) is
completely hidden before locking.

Figure 2 below shows a cable that may occasionally fail to contact. (Seems to be firmly inserted,
but is not fixed. Pulling a cable causes disconnection.)
Figure 3 shows a cable mounted correctly.

PD-AMP board

Flexible cable

Connector is locked without firm connection


of cable (cable is disconnected easily).

Figure 1. Back view of 135AFC


(back cover is removed)

Lock Lock

Terminal (silver part) Terminal (silver part) is


shows hidden
Figure 2. Faulty connection Figure 3. Proper connection

If connection is faulty, power is not supplied to sensor detection light LED, causing failure of
LED illumination. That causes no detection of film, no film transportation, and no detection of error.

§-37 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6-4-3. Cleaning sensor

1 Remove the bottom cover following the step 1


in [6-4-2. Replacing PD-AMP board]. c a

2 Removed and clean SENS A a (3 points) and


SENS B b (2 points) by removing screw c (1
point). a
c
Fix SENS A as it is. Using caution not to catch b
wire, mount SENS A. b c
[Fix SENS B referring to drawing below as it
has direction to be pushed.] c
a c
POINT

- F No. and DX code cannot be read correctly


unless it is placed at the correct position.

b c b a

矢印方向に
寄せてねじ止め

a c c b

3 Install the removed components exactly as before.

§-38 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6-4.4. Cleaning the cleaning brushes (upper and lower)

NOTE

- Use a blower brush to clean it.


- Do not use an air duster or the like of which air pressure is too high and bristles go inside.

[Cleaning the upper cleaning brush]


a
1 Remove the press-fit cover following the steps
1 through 2 in [6-4-1. Replacing 135 LED
board].

2 Remove two screws a, and remove the


cleaning brush b together with brush holder
bracket and then clean the brush.

3 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

§-39 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
[Cleaning the lower cleaning brush]

1 Remove four screws a and then remove the a


bottom cover.

2 Remove two screws b, and remove the


cleaning brush c together with brush holder
bracket and then clean the brush.

3 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

§-40 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6-4-5. Replacing timing belt

1 Open the press-fit cover. Remove the two


screws a, and the remove the tension plate
b.

2 Remove and replace timing belt c.


b
3 Install a tension plate Assy b and fix it with
screws (2 screws).

4 Adjust tension of timing belt after replacing it.


a
5 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

§-41 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Adjusting the tension of the timing belt

1 Remove the four screws from the rear cover of the 135AFC.

2 Loosen the two screws from the tension plate assembly.

3 Run the timing belt several times by turning the knob at the rear, and confirm that it does not get
onto the pulley.

4 Secure the tension plate assembly with the two screws in the state in which the tension spring
and the timing belt are balanced. Avoid rotation of the tension plate when loosening screw.

Tension spring

* A pin extends from the products of only the initial lot, and they do not have the tension spring.
After taking the steps 1 to 3 above, apply a load of 350 to 500 g•N to the timing belt between the
pulleys and secure the tension bracket with the screws in the state in which the deflection of the
timing belt is 3 mm.
Do not fix the timing belt with a pin.
If the tension panel Assy is simply fixed from the top, too much load is applied to the timing belt.

Pin

§-42 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6-4-6. Replacing rod lens

1 Remove four screws a and then remove the


bottom cover.
a
2 Remove two screws b and remove rod lens
c for replacing

3 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

§-43 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6-5. Input-unit PC

6-5-1. Replacing input-unit PC

(Required components)
With machines for Japan: 270087001C Personal computer unit: 1
With UL or CE machines: 270287001C Personal computer unit (English version): 1
* The features (e.g., appearance and configuration) of personal computers are all the same except the
operating system.
With a personal computer containing the operating system in Japanese, drive C is identified by the
red round sticker.
With a personal computer containing the operating system in English, drive C is identified by the
green round sticker.
Drive D for storage is common to the operating systems in both Japanese and English and is
identified by the yellow round sticker.

(Required tool)
3.5-inch floppy disk (1.4MB, formatted): 1

●Input-unit personal computer replacement procedure

[1] Backing up the data

[2] Replacing the personal computer

[3] Restoring the data

[4] Confirming setup and operation

[1] Backing up the data

Make backup copies on the 3.5-inch floppy disk according to the procedure explained in "12-1-1. Input
Station DP-1000 Data Backup" of the separate document "12. Application data backup and reloading
procedures."

§-44 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
[2] Replacing the personal computer

NOTE

- Shut down the input station, turn off the film scanner, disconnect the AC cord and wiring, and
then start the operation below.

(1) Remove the connectors from the rear of the personal computer.

(2) Remove the personal computer from the table.

(3) Place the new personal computer on the table.

Voltage setting switch

* Set the voltage setting switch as follows:


Japan→ 115V
UL → 115V
CE → 230V

§-45 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
(4) Connect the cables to the connectors on the rear of the personal computer.

<Current PC>

2
3

1 6
!0 1 Dedicated keyboard (USB)
2 Full keyboard (PS/2)
3 Mouse (PS/2)
8 4 CRT (Video Board)
9 5 Flat bed scanner (SCSI)
4 6 PC card reader (USB)
7 Scanner unit (IEEE1394)
7 8 HUB (Internal LAN)
9 AC cable (Inlet)
5 !0 UPS (RS-232C)

<New PC (Type 2)>

2
3

!0 1 Dedicated keyboard (USB)


2 Full keyboard (PS/2)
3 Mouse (PS/2)
4 CRT (Video Board)
8 9
5 Flat bed scanner (SCSI)
6 PC card reader (USB)
4
7 Scanner unit (IEEE1394)
8 HUB (Internal LAN)
7 9 AC cable (Inlet)
5 !0 UPS (RS-232C)

1 6

§-46 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
[3] Restoring the data

Restore the backup data from the 3.5-inch floppy disk according to the procedure explained in "12-2-1.
Restoration from Input Station DP-1000 Backup Data" of the separate document "12. Application data
backup and reloading procedures."

[4] Confirming setup and operation

1) Film scanner setup


Set up the film scanner.
Mode: Setup → 12. Individual setup → 122. Film scanner setup

(1) Shading data creation (for general-purpose machine 135 and/or 240)

●Scanner setup procedure

1 Check the current carrier(s) in the "Carrier used" field.


Examples: Only 135AFC used: Check 135AFC.
135AFC and 240AFC used: Check both.
UFC, 135AFC and 240AFC used: Check all the three.
2 After setting the carrier, click the "Setup Start" button. Proceed the setup according to the
instructions on the screen.

(2) Backing up the input station data

1 Setup → 15 Data management → 151 Create backup data


2 The tag is set to "Input ST."
3 Confirm that the write destination (Specify to which) is C:¥, and click the create backup
copy button.

§-47 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF PRINTER SECTION (DP-1000E)

IMPORTANT:
• Turn off all power sources.
• When unplugging the power cord, make sure that the power has been
completely turned off, and remove the plug from the socket by pulling on the
plug connector section, not the power cable. (Use the same method for
plugging in the unit)
• Before removing circuit boards, switches or sensors in the system, discharge
static electricity from your body by touching other metal part of the system.
• When adjusting a board or a replacing a power supply unit, use a ceramic
screwdriver. Do not use a metal screwdriver.

7-1. Air filter

7-1-1. Cleaning air filter

1 Remove air filters a of printer section.

2 Wash the filters with water, dry the filters well,


and then re-mount the filters.
a
Replace if it is too dirty.

¶-1 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3 Remove thumb screw b under the sub drive,
and then remove the filter mounting plate.

4 Wash the filter c, dry the filter well and then


re-mount the filter.

¶-2 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-2. Magazine Mounting section

7-2-1. Check and replace pin slide plate

[Check]
1 Check that shutter pin of the magazine is pressed,
and check the pin for wearing.

[Replace]
1 Remove two screws a.
Replace the pin slide plate b. (Loosen two screws
a to adjust the height of pin slide plate b.

a
b

Standard for adjustment

- The shutter pin at the top of paper magazine must be pressed by 2.8mm plus or minus
0.2mm when the shutter is open, allowing the paper to be pulled out at no load.

¶-3 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-2-2. Replace light shield

1 Check deterioration of the light shield (sponge) a


of 8-inch magazine adapter and printer unit.

2 Replace the light shield with new one as


necessary.

a
8-inch magazine adapter assy

7-2-3. Check operation of lock lever

1 Check that lock lever a rotates smoothly to release the sub drive pinch roller toward upper
position, and check that the roller is held down at lower position anchoring the magazine firmly.

¶-4 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-2-4. Clean photo sensor

[Clean]
1 Take out the sub drive. a

2 Remove connector a.

3 Remove screw b.

4 Remove sensor. b

5 Clean the photo sensor with a blower brush.

7-2-5. Clean and replace entrance sensors (two sensors)

[Clean] b
1 Take out the sub drive.

2 Remove two screws a, and then remove the


entrance sensor mounting plate b and entrance
sensor (DET).

3 Remove two screws c, and then remove the


entrance sensor mounting plate d and entrance
sensor (LED). a

4 Clean the entrance sensor with a blower brush.

[Replace]
1 Remove two screws e, and remove the entrance
sensor mounting plate f together with entrance c
sensors g, and then replace the components. d

2 After mounting new sensors, check the on-and-off


operations. f

3 Reinstall the removed components.


e

¶-5 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-2-6. Clean and replace Magazine-Data board

[Clean]
1 Remove two screws a, and then remove the
sensor cover.

2 Clean the Magazine-Data board with a blower


brush.

[Replace]
1 Remove four screws b and connector c, and
then remove and replace Magazine-Data board.

2 Reinstall the removed components. a

b c

¶-6 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-3. Operation Panel

7-3-1. Replacing LCD-CPU board and inverter power supply

1 Open the printer front door.

2 Remove two screws on front a that holds top


panel, and open the top panel and support the
door with the support bar.

3 Remove two screws b on the operation panel a


mounting plate, and remove the operation
panel together with the unit.

4 Remove four screws c and connectors


(LCCN3 and LCCN5, and then replace LCD- b
CPU board d.

POINT

- Confirm that the new LCD board is set as


shown below.
- SW1: OFF
- VR1: Rightmost

IMPORTANT c

- When replacing the LCD-CPU board, confirm


the versions of the LCD and Resource,
and download the driver as needed.

5 Then, remove two locking supports e at the


back side, and replace the inverter power d
supply f.

6 Install the removed components exactly as e


before.

¶-7 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-3-2. Replacing operation touch panel and LCD module

1 Open the printer front door.

2 Remove two screws on front a that holds top


panel, and open the top panel and support the
door with the support bar.

3 Remove the four washer-provided screws b (2 a


for each retainer), and remove the right and left
retainers c.

c
NOTE

- To prevent the operation panel from


dropping, hold it with your hand while
carrying out the work.

4 Remove the four washer-provided screws d b


from the LCD module.

¶-8 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
5 Remove two flexible cables g connected to
operation touch panel and LCD module, and
remove connector (N77) h connected to the
inverter power supply, and then replace the
operation touch panel and LCD module i.

6 Procedure for attaching touch panel insulation

Applicable machine number: 2710: ∼0027 (except 0026 machine)


2716: ∼0127

(1) Verify that the power of the unit has been turned off.
(2) Open the front door, raise the top plate, and fix it using the prop.
(3) Spread a piece of cloth by the side of the operator panel unit (so you can place the removed
touch panel on it).

Spread cloth

¶-9 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
(4) Take off left retaining plate (1) (271011098E). The screws, spring washers, and flat washers
holding the retaining plate are all separate pieces. Be careful not to lose them while removing
them.

NOTE

・ Under no circumstances should you use SEMS screws (one-piece screws, spring
washers, and flat washers).

Then, take off right retaining plate (2) (271011099E). When doing this, hold down the touch
panel to prevent it from slipping down as you remove the retaining plate.

Retaining plate-holding screws are enclosed (two screws per plate).

Retaining Retaining
plate (1) plate (2)
271011098E 271011099E

Touch panel(587076901B)

(5) Turn the touch panel around its left side (see photos below), and place it on the cloth. When
doing this, be careful not to jerk or break the flat cable.

Keep an eye on flat cable.

¶-10 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
(6) Stick the insulating sheets (271011148A) on the LCD frame. Stick the sheets both at the top
and at the bottom by making them flush with the LCD port frame. Carefully keep the sheets
from protruding into the image area. Do not cover the air vents at the top of the LCD. (The
insulating sheet size is 9 mm x 150 mm.)

Insulating sheet (271011148A).


Do not cover air vents.

LCD frame
(584076701A). To be flush. To be flush.

LCD port frame

To be flush. To be flush.

(9 mm)
(150 mm)

Insulating sheet (271011148A).

(7) To assemble the operator panel unit, put the touch panel back on the LCD, and partly tighten
right retaining plate (2), while holding down the touch panel. Next, attach and partly tighten left
retaining plate (1).
At this point, check to see that the plates (plastic) on the retaining plate insides for positioning
the touch panel are not riding on top of it.
Adjust the position until the gaps are uniform between the touch panel frame and LCD port
frame at the top, bottom, left, and right. Then, fully tighten the retaining plates. (Adjust the
position by watching the gaps between the gray LCD frame and green touch panel parts.
This completes the assembling.

7 Install the removed components exactly as before.

8 Turn on the printer-processor, and check the touch panel to be sure that it operates without any
signs of malfunction.
* The display intensity can be reduced by pressing the top-right corner of the operator touch panel.
The intensity can be increased by pressing the top-left corner.

¶-11 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-4. Printer-Unit PC

7-4-1. Replacing printer-unit PC

●Printer-unit personal computer replacement procedure

[1] Backing up the data

[2] Replacing the personal computer

[3] Restoring the data

[4] Confirming setup and operation

[1] Backing up the data

Make backup copies on the 3.5-inch floppy disk according to the procedure explained in "12-1-1.
Printer DP-1000 Data Backup" of the separate document "12. Application data backup and reloading
procedures."

¶-12 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
[2] Replacing the personal computer

When completing the backup of the personal computer data, turn off the printer processor power
switch (breaker). Start the replacement procedure after the personal computer has shut down. It shuts
down about two minutes after the breaker is turned off. Make sure of the shutdown by the buzzer or
POWER LED.

1) Remove eight machine screws a that secure the front cover of the personal computer unit, and
remove the front cover.

2) ・Open the printer front door.


・Remove the two screws a that secure
the top plate, and open it.
・Remove three screws b holding the back
cover.
・Close the top panel.
・Remove two screws on back cover. (Only
b
loosen the screws at the top.) Tilt the
back cover toward back, and pull up the
cover to remove.

¶-13 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3) Check for the cable clamps.
* Before starting the work, unclamp the LAN cable and HDC-PCI cable on the rear of the personal
computer. (There are two cable clamps at the circled positions in the picture.)

Top view of the personal computer Side view from the rear of the personal computer

2 cable clamps (upper and lower)

2 cable clamps on the


rear of L sheet metal

HDC-PCI cable
LAN cable

4) Slide the personal computer forward (toward the magazine).


Stop sliding when the top of the personal computer extends about 15 cm.
* Be careful not to pull any cables in sliding the personal computer.

About 15 cm

¶-14 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
5) Disconnect the following from the rear of the personal computer.
1 LAN cable
2 Serial connector (D-sub9P)
3 Serial connector (D-sub37P)
4 HDC-PCI connector
5 Power cord

Top view of the personal computer Rear view of the personal computer

6) Remove the personal computer from the printer unit.

¶-15 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7) Install the new personal computer, connect the following to the rear of the personal computer, and
clamp them:
1 LAN cable
2 Serial connector (D-sub9P)
3 Serial connector (D-sub37P)
4 HDC-PCI connector
5 Power cord

Rear view of the personal computer

8) Set the new personal computer to the specified position. (To make the wiring neat, set the personal
computer to the position shown below.)

About 3 cm

¶-16 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
9) Install the front cover of the personal computer unit, close the top plate, and secure them with the
machine screws.
- Front cover of the personal computer unit: 8 machine screws
- Top plate: 2 machine screws

IMPORTANT

- The screw of the front cover of the personal computer also prevents light leakage.
Be sure to tighten all the screws into the original holes.
- Since the screws (2 screws) for fixing the top plate are not normally handled by customers, make
sure the screws are fixed properly.

[3] Restoring the data

Restore the backup data from the 3.5-inch floppy disk according to the procedure explained in "11-1-2.
Restoration from Printer DP-1000 Backup Data" of the separate document "11. Application data
backup and reloading procedures."

[4] Confirming setup and operation

Check for the following test prints:


1 Head calibration correction test print
Mode: Setup → 12 Individual setup → 124 Head calibration
2) Master channel correction test print
Mode: Setup → 12 Individual setup → 125 Correct master channel color
3) Head position adjustment test print
Mode: Maintenance → 24 Printer unit → 245 Adjust head positions

[2] Backing up the printer data

1 Setup -> 15 Data management → 151 Create backup data


2 The tag is set to "Printer unit."
3 Confirm that the write destination (Specify to which) is C:¥, and click the create backup copy
button.

¶-17 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-4-2. Replacing HDC-PCI board

When no work space is available on the side of the printer, remove the clamp and each connector
according to [2] Personal computer replacement of the printer PC, withdraw the personal computer,
and carry out the work.

1 Remove the rear cover from the printer


according to the procedure explained in "7-4-1.
Replacing printer-unit PC, [2] Replacing the
personal computer. "

2 Remove 7 screws a and remove the output


a
PC cover.
a a
3 Remove the connector from the SCSI that is
connected with the HDC-PCI board.

4 Remove a screw b and pull out the HDC-PCI


board c to remove and replace the board.

5 Install the removed components exactly as


before. b

POINT

- Confirm that DSW1 of the new HDC-PCI


board is set as shown below.
c
1: ON, 2: OFF, 3: ON, 4: ON

IMPORTANT

- When replacing the HDC-PCI board, confirm


the version of the FPGA, and update the FPGA
to the latest version as needed.

¶-18 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-5. Sub drive

7-5-1. How to remove sub drive

1 Turn the magazine lock lever a to "Lock"


a
side.

2 Loosen the thumbscrew b (one screw)


completely.

3 Place 7 hose c to the OPEN side and


remove the hose.

4 Hold the handle (A-1) and the pull out the


sub drive slightly.

5 Hold the sub drive shaft (A-2 and A-3) and


remove the sub drive.
b c

POINT

- When removing a sub drive section for


maintenance of the magazine unit (type 1)
connection or fixing paper jam, remove the
exit guide of the double magazine unit and
then remove the sub drive.
Alternatively, remove the double magazine
unit fixing screws (upper and lower) and shift
the double magazine to the left side.

¶-19 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-5-2. Cleaning inside paper dust duct (Every six month)

1 Take out the sub drive, unlock the snap lock 3


and remove the paper dust duct 2. 2

2 Remove the two screws a and four screws b.

NOTE

- The duct stationary plate c to secure a catch


clip is installed with the screws. Be careful 3
not to drop or lose the stationary plate.

c
a

3 Open the paper dust duct, remove the


discharging brush and guide d from the duct,
and clean the inside of the paper dust duct with
a blower brush.

NOTE

- The paper dust duct has the catch e.


Do not forcibly open the paper dust duct. d
Doing so may cause damage to the catch.

4 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

¶-20 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-5-3. Cleaning flap plate sensor

1 Take out the sub drive, unlock the snap lock 3


and remove the paper dust duct 2. 2

2 Remove two screws a, and remove cover (2)


b. Remove wo screws c, and then remove
the front cover d.

3 Remove three screws e, and remove air hose


f.
3

NOTE c a

• When mounting cover (2), make sure that the d


potion shown below is securely fit within the
unit.

f
e

¶-21 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4 Remove a screw g and then remove the flap
plate sensor together with the sensor mounting
board.

5 Remove connector (JP40) and clean the


sensor h.

6 Install the sensor h.

g
POINT

- Install the sensor h at the lowest position. h

7 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

¶-22 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-5-4. Replacing cutter unit

1 Remove air hose following the steps 1


through 3 in [7-5-3. Cleaning flap plate
a
sensor].

2 Remove the three screws (1 a at the rear, and


2 b at the front) that secure the cutter unit.

3 Remove the wiring from the two clamps, and


disconnect the connector JJ32 c.
Similarly, remove the wiring from the three
clamps, and disconnect the connector JJ51 d.

¶-23 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4 Remove the cutter unit.
f
5 Remove two screws e to remove duct guide
(2) f for replacing cutter unit.

6 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

NOTE
e g
- Be careful of the edge of the cutter in
replacing the cutter unit. Hold the frame but
not the motor g while carrying out the work.

¶-24 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-5-5. Replacing three timing belts

1 Remove the paper dust duct, the cover (2), and


the front cover according to steps 1 and 2 of
a
the procedure explained in "7-5-3. Cleaning
flap plate sensor."

2 Remove and replace the three timing belts (2


a at the front and 1 b at the rear).

3 Slightly loosen the screw of the tension plate


c.

4 Run each timing belt several times, and secure


the tension plate with the screw in the state in
which the tension spring and the timing belt are
balanced.

5 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

¶-25 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-5-6. Cleaning two cutter sensors, duct detection sensor, and
crimp-style solenoid sensors (upper and lower)

1 Remove the cutter unit following the steps in


[7-5-4. Replacing cutter unit].

2 Clean the cutter sensor a (two sensors) with a


blower brush.

3 Clean the duct detection sensor b and the


crimp-style solenoid sensors (upper and lower)
c with a blower brush. a

4 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

¶-26 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-5-7. Cleaning rollers (annually)

[Cleaning the R1 roller]


b
1 Remove the sub draive following the steps in
[7-5-1. How to remove sub drive].

2 Remove the four screws (2 for each guide) b a


that secure the guides (upper and lower) a,
and remove the guides.

3 Wipe the whole circumference of the R1 roller


c with a dump cloth (soak cloth in water and
squeeze it firmly) while turning the knob 1 with
your hand.

4 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

c
1

¶-27 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
[Cleaning R2 roller]

e
1 Remove the cutter unit following the steps in
[7-5-4. Replacing cutter unit].

2 Remove screws e and f and then remove


guide plate A.

3 Wipe the whole circumference of the R2 roller


c with a dump cloth (soak cloth in water and
squeeze it firmly) while turning the knob 4 with
your hand.

4 Install the removed components exactly as


before. f

¶-28 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
[Cleaning and replacing the R3 roller and the
exit sensors (upper and lower)]
a
<Cleaning the R3 roller>

1 Remove the two screws a (right and left), and


remove the mounting plate ((b)) of the lower
exit sensor.

¶-29 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
2 Remove the two screws c, and remove the
mounting plate d of the upper exit sensor. c

3 Wipe the whole circumference of the R3 roller


e with a dump cloth (soak cloth in water and
squeeze it firmly) while turning it with your
hand.

<Cleaning the exit sensors (upper and lower)>

1 Clean the upper and lower exit sensors f, g


which are installed on the sensor-mounting
plates, with a blower brush.

<Replacing the exit sensors (upper and lower)>

1 Remove the two screws g, and replace the f


exit sensors f.
2 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

¶-30 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-5-8. Replacing SDU-DRV board

1 Remove the two screws a, and remove the


board cover.

2 Remove the cables from the cable clamp b,


and disconnect the seven connectors and the
ground c.

3 Remove the two screws d from the side, and


a
pull out the SDU-DRV board together with the
mounting plate e.

4 Remove the six locking supports, and replace


the SDU-DRV board.
b
5 Place the SDU-DRV board which is on the
mounting plate, back to the original position,
connect the connectors and ground wire, and
clamp the cables.

6 Install the removed components exactly as c


before.

¶-31 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-6. Exposure unit / Exposure feed unit

7-6-1. Replacing exposure unit

●Exposure unit replacement procedure

1. Remove the exposure transfer unit from the printer unit.

2. Separate the exposure unit from the exposure transfer unit.

3. Install the new exposure unit in the exposure transfer unit.

4. Register the provided exposure unit data (FD) into the printer unit.

5. Check for the skew and transfer center.

1 Remove exposure unit.


Remove screws a (9 screws) and remove
Printer CPU cover.

2 Remove clamps b and c (clamp c is held


down with screw c (one screw)). Remove two
connectors e and f of the exposure unit.
a

b
d
f

¶-32 270YE600B
Aug. 2002

fineline6
3 Remove hexagonal-head bolts g (2mm) with
washer.

4 Hold the handle (C-1) of the exposure transfer


unit, and slightly pull out the exposure transfer
unit. g

5 Remove the exposure feed unit by holding the


green-labeled potions of the shaft (C-2 and C-
3). (See "Point" below.)

POINT

・If the unit is carried holding other than C-2 and C-3, it will cause deformation (bent)
or breakage then transportation trouble.

¶-33 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6 Remove the E ring h fixing the gas spring
using a screwdriver.

7 Unlock the snap lock on the front, open the


exposure unit, remove the gas spring from the
9
bearing by manually pressing the exposure unit
while the gas spring is stretched and bring it 8
down. Then, bring down the exposure unit
gently.

8 Remove the four hexagon head bolts i from


the rear panel. h

¶-34 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
9 Remove the exposure unit j.
(Slightly slide the exposure unit forward, and lift
it off.)
j

!0 Mount new exposure unit.

<Installation procedure>
k
(1) Place the new exposure unit on the
feed base of the exposure feed unit.
The transfer base has two positioning pins
k (front and rear). Fit the pins into the front
pin hole and rear pin slot in the exposure
unit.

(2) When having placed the exposure unit on


the exposure feed unit, lock the snap lock.

NOTE

- Do not connect the gas spring and the


exposure unit in this step.

To check the exposure unit for the normal


installation, see if the white-painted screws
on both sides of the exposure unit fit into
the notches.

¶-35 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
(3) Eliminate any gap by pressing "Section l"
on the top of the hinge side of the exposure
unit and fix the hinge in the exposure feed l
section. (4 hexagon screws)

(4) Unlock the snap lock 8, open the


exposure unit, lift the gas spring, connect
the gas spring and the exposure unit to the
gas spring bearing, and install the E ring.

(5) Detach the protection tape from the glass


surface of the exposure unit.

(6) Lock the snap lock 8 again, and confirm m


the clearances of the parts m and n.

IMPORTANT

- Each clearance of the parts m and m must 0.03 mm or less


be 0.03 mm or less.

!1 Install the removed components exactly as


before.
n

0.03 mm or less

0.03 mm or less 0.03 mm or less

No clearance is allowed. (rating: 0.03mm or less)

¶-36 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
!2 Following the procedures given below, register the provided exposure unit data (FD) on the printer
unit.

【1】 Preparation
・ Backup data FD (provided with the exposure unit)
FD name: "DP-1000 Exposure unit data"
Unit number: The serial management number of the exposure unit is shown.

【2】 Operation for the printer


1) Remove the eight machine screws that secure the front cover of the personal computer
unit in the output section, and remove the front cover.
2) Insert the provided backup data FD into the floppy disk drive of the printer-unit
personal computer.
3) On the LCD panel of the printer, select Mode→2.maintain→4.Printer→
Down arrow(↓)→9.Read/Write pixel correction form the printer LCD panel. When
the screen "9. Reading and writing of inter-pixel correction value" appears, select
"Read from FD."

4) When the loading of data is completed, return to the printer HOME screen, and remove
the floppy disk.
5) Install the front cover of the personal computer unit, and secure it with the eight machine
screws.

IMPORTANT

- The machine screws not only secure the front cover but also serve to prevent light
leakage. Be sure to tighten all the screws into the original holes.

¶-37 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
【3】 Operation at input station
1) Insert the provided backup data FD into the floppy disk drive of the personal computer.
2) On the home screen of the input station, select Setup → 15. Data management →
152. Data restore. When the screen "152. Access data" appears, select "Printer unit"
tag.
3) Specify drive A for "Loading Source Drive."

4) Click "Access file list."


Confirm that "pm4.txt" and sh12.txt" are displayed checked in the Dev data list box.
5) Click the "Restore" button.
The message "The loading of data starts" is displayed. Click the "Yes" button.
6) When the loading of data is completed, return to the home screen and remove the floppy
disk.

¶-38 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
!3 Following the procedures given below, check skew movement and feed center.
When an exposure feed unit is replaced also, carry out the following checking and adjustment.

● Skewing adjustment procedures

(Rating)
Within plus or minus 7 pixels (within plus or minus 0.6 mm) against printing length of 381mm.
※|B-A|≦ 7 pixels or less (0.6mm or less)

(Procedures)
【1】 Load the widest paper among ones currently used, which has a width of 203mm or more.
Go to step 7 for adjusting with paper of width less than 203mm.
【2】 Select Mode→2. Maintain → 4. Printer → 2. produce test prints and then select
"1_pchar27.bmp."
【3】 Press P>> to specify printing conditions.
・ Print size width: Select width of test print
・ Print size length: 381 mm
・ Overspill: 1.5mm
Press P>> further to specify the following conditions:
・ Set layout: Fit to paper, Rotate 0
・ Set image: Fit to Real, Rotate 0
・ LUT: 1
【4】 Press "Print."
【5】 Against transfer direction of output print, measure the charts of A and B position at the
top.
【6】 With reference to chart reading method, calculate |B-A|.
|B-A| ≦ 7 pixels No adjustment is required.
|B-A| >7 pixels Go to step 8.

B 1
A
Read chart scales at the top of sheet.
If scale cannot be read, read at the
bottom of sheet (Note that A and B
positions are reversed at the bottom.)

Paper feed direction

This level bar is at the edge.


In this example, 8 level bars
including reference line are seen.

(A) (B)
A 8th level bars including
reference line are invisible.
<Chart reading method>
Level bar
Read A and B parts, and calculate
differences. y="7 " lines
Judge by the number of level bars 10-pixel step
that are recognized.
In example A, bars as far as the Reference line
"8th chart" are recognized.
Because the number if level bars Level bar
is 17: y×10+y' = 7×10+8 =78 "y' " =8
Similarly in example B, bars as
far as"5th chart" are recognized. B
The number of level bars are 7 in
this example also. Therefore: 50
7×10+5 = 75 10 pixels
Thus, pixels

|B-A|is |75-78|= 3 
This example does not require
adjustment. Interval between level bars

¶-39 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
【7】 Adjusting with paper of width less than 203mm
Print on the widest paper among ones currently used.

【7-1】Select 2. Maintain → 4. Printer → 2. Produce test prints and then select


"1_pchar51.bmp"(grid pattern).
【7-2】Press P>> to specify printing conditions.
・ Print size width: Select width of test print
・ Print size length: 381 mm
・ Overspill: 1.5mm
Press P>> further to specify the following conditions:
・ Set layout: Fit to paper, Rotate 0
・ Set image: Fit to Real, Rotate 0
・ LUT: 1
【7-3】Press "Print."
【7-4】At the A position in the figure below, measure the distance (Xa) between the upper
edge of sheet and the second grid.
At the B position, measure the distance (Xb) between the upper edge of sheet and the
grid at the same point as measured at A.
(A peak loupe (x10) makes measurement easier.)

【7-5】Calculate B-A.
Deviation is within plus or minus 0.6mm: No adjustment is required.
If deviation is more than 0.6mm, go to step 8 for adjustment.
*One rotation of adjustment screw results in movement of 1.2mm on printing.

¶-40 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
【8】 Adjusting procedures

【8-1】When adjusting on paper with a width of


Fixing screw Fixing screw
203mm or more, calculate "B-A" pixels.
When adjusting on paper with a width less
than 203mm, calculate B-A mm
【8-2】Measure "D" using a scale.
(This is used for a reference for adjustment.
Measure in mm, to the first decimal place.)
【8-3】Loosen the four fixing screws shown in the
figure on the right.
【8-4】If "B-A" calculated in step 8-1 is:
Greater than 0, turn adjustment screw Fixing screw
Fixing screw
counter-clockwise.
Adjustment screw
Smaller than 0, turn adjustment screw
clockwise.
(Reference) Rotation of adjustment screw and
moving amount
<Adjusting on paper with width of 203mm or
Rotation of Move of D Moving on print
more> screw (mm) By pixels By mm
1) Calculate turns of adjustment screw with
0.5 turns 0.4 7 0.6
reference to table on the right.
2) Turn the screw for the moving amount. 1 turn 0.7 14 1.2

Measure the moving amount with scale, and 5 turns 1.1 21 1.8
tighten the fixing screws at the front of light 2 turns 1.5 28 2.4
exposure transfer base at a position where D is ※ One turn of adjustment screw moves D by
appropriate. approx. 0.7 mm, which is moving approx.
14 pixels (approx. 1.2mm)

<Adjusting on paper with width less than 203mm>


Turn adjustment screw for moving amount.
Measure the moving amount with scale, and tighten the fixing screws at the front of light
exposure transfer base at a position where D is appropriate.

※ When turning the adjustment screw counter-clockwise (loosening),press the exposure


transfer base to the left to remove play.

Example: Adjustment on paper of width more than 203mm resulted in "B-A=14."


According to the conversion table above, the adjustment screw must be rotated
by one turn, counter-clockwise. If actual distance of D is 80mm before loosing the
fixing screws, one turn of the adjustment screw counter-clockwise results in
moving of D by +0.7mm.
Therefore, the two fixing screws at the front must be tightened when D=80+0.7
becomes 80.7mm.
【9】 Output print for verification.
If measurement result satisfies the specifications, turn off the power of the unit, remove
the light exposure/exposure transfer unit, and tighten the two fixing screws at the back.
If measurement result does not satisfy the specifications, loosen the two screws at the
front of light exposure base and repeat adjustment procedures starting with step 8-4.

【10】Mount exposure/exposure feed unit and turn on the power.

¶-41 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
● Image center adjustment procedures (Mechanism part)

(Rating)
Within plus or minus 6 pixels against paper center (within plus or minus 0.5mm).
Note 1. If the amount of departure is over 6 pixels (0.5mm), adjustment is required.
Note 2. The mechanism allows adjustment of plus or minus 1.5mm physically.

(Procedures)
【1】 Load the widest paper among ones currently used, which has a width of 203mm or more.
Go to step 7 for adjusting with paper of width less than 203mm.
【2】 Select 2. Maintain → 4. Printer → 2. Produce test prints and then select
"1_pchar27.bmp."
【3】 Press P>> to specify printing conditions.
・ Print size width: Select width of test print
・ Print size length: 381 mm
・ Overspill: 1.5mm
Press P>> further to specify the following conditions:
・ Set layout: Fit to paper, Rotate 0
・ Set image: Fit to Real, Rotate 0
・ LUT: 1
【4】 Press "Print."
【5】 Measure the charts of x1 and x2 on the output print.
【6】 With reference to chart reading method, calculate (X2-X1)/2.
A chart reading method is the same with that for skewing adjustment.
X=| (X2-X1)/2| ≦ 6 pixels No adjustment is required.
X=| (X2-X1)/2| >6 pixels Go to step 8.

X1

Paper feed direction

X2

¶-42 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
【7】 Adjusting with paper of width less than 203mm

【7-1】 Output test print using paper with a width of 203mm or less.
【7-2】 Measure the distance between the Magenta cross at the center and paper edge, using
a scale.
【7-3】 Calculate deviation amount X=(B-A)/2.
Deviation is within plus or minus 0.5mm: No adjustment is required.
If deviation exceeds plus or minus 0.5mm, go to step 8.

【8】 Adjusting procedures

【8-1】 When adjusting on paper with a width of Connector mounting plate


ficing screw
203mm or more, calculate "(X2-X1)/2"
pixels.
When adjusting on paper with a width less
than 203mm, calculate (B-A)/2" mm
【8-2】 Measure "D" using a scale.
(This is used for a reference for adjustment.
Measure in mm, to the first decimal place.)
【8-3】 Draw lines of connector mounting plate.
(This is used for adjustment.)
【8-4】 Loosen the fixing screws.
・ Two fixing screws on adjustment screw
mounting plate
・ Two fixing screws of connector mounting
plate
(Connector mounting plate moves
forward and backward by 2mm Fixing screw Fixing screw

respectively.)
Adjustment screw
【8-5】 For adjusting with paper of a width less
than 203mm, go to step 8-6.
For adjusting with paper with width of
203mm or more, calculate a moving
amount of adjustment screw with reference
to the following conversion table.
Moving amount table
Number of Distance For example, if X' is 10 pixels,
Dots mm moving amount of D is 0.85mm.
5 0.42 Moving amount of adjustment screw D for the number of
10 0.85 pixels not listed in table is found by: X=X'*0.0846(mm)
15 1.27
20 1.69

¶-43 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
【8-6】 On the basis of calculation results, perform the following adjustments:
The adjustment screw moves by approx.0.7mm (8 pixels) for one rotation.
If calculation resut is "−(minus)"
Move connector mounting plate to the back by X (mm) and lock it.
Turn adjustment screw clockwise to (D-X) mm and lock it.

If calculation resut is "+ (plus)"


Move connector mounting plate to the front by X (mm) and lock it.
Turn adjustment screw counter-clockwise to (D-X) mm and lock it.

【9】 Output print for verification.


If measurement results is out of standard, repeat procedures starting with 8-4.
※ If mechanical adjustment does not satisfy specifications or requres "zero-adjustment"
endlessly, adjust software with, "3. Image center adjustment procedures, Center
position adjustment by software (main scanning)

【10】Mount exposure/exposure feed unit and turn on the power.

¶-44 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
● Image center adjustment procedures_sub scanning (Software part)

The following adjustment procedures are applicable only when adjustment is impossible by
either skewing adjustment (mechanism) or image center machical adjustment.
Center position is adjusted by software.

(Rating)
Within plus or minus 6 pixels against paper center (within plus or minus 0.5 mm)

(Procedures)
【1】 Complete machanical adjustment processes of skewing adjustment and image center
adjustment procedures.
Load the widest paper among ones currently used.
【2】 Press 2. Maintain → 4. Printer → 5. Adjust head positions
【3】 Press "Print."
【4】 Measure the charts of Y1 and Y2 on the output print.
A chart reading method is the same with that for skewing adjustment.
Y=| (Y2-Y1)/2| ≦ 6 pixels No adjustment is required.
Y=| (Y2-Y1)/2| >6 pixels Go to step 6.
【5】 With reference to chart reading method, calculate (Y2-Y1)/2.

Y1
Y2 Paper feed direction

【6】 Calculate Y= (Y2-Y1)/2, enter calculation result to cetner position Y, and press
"Register."

¶-45 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
● Image center adjustment procedures Main scanning (Software part)

The following adjustment procedures are applicable only when adjustment is impossible by
either skewing adjustment (mechanism) or image center machical adjustment.
Center position is adjusted by software.

(Rating)
Within plus or minus 3 pixels against paper center (within plus or minus 0.2 mm).

(Procedures)
【1】 Load the widest paper among ones currently used, which has a width of 203mm or more.
Go to step 6 for adjusting with paper of width less than 203mm.
【2】 Press 2. Maintain → 4. Printer → 5. Adjust head positions.
【3】 Press "Print."
【4】 Measure the charts of x1 and x2 on the output print.
【5】 With reference to chart reading method, calculate (X2-X1)/2.
A chart reading method is the same with that for skewing adjustment.
X=| (X2-X1)/2| ≦ 3 pixels No adjustment is required.
X=| (X2-X1)/2| >3 pixels Go to step 7.

X1

Paper feed direction

X2

¶-46 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
【6】 Adjusting with paper of width less than 203mm
Measure the distance between the Magenta cross at the center and paper edge, using a
scale. Convert the measurement result into the number of pixels.

Data entry to software must Distance Number of


be in the number of pixels. mm Dots
Calculation method
Calculate deviation on the
X’(mm)÷0.08466(mm) 0.42 5
basis of A and B (X'=(B- 0.85 10
A)/2), and convert the value =X(pixels) 1.27 15
into the number of pixels. 1.69 20

【7】 Calculate X= (X2-X1)/2, or calculate the number of pixels on the basis of X', enter
calculation result to center position X, and press "Register."

【8】 Read the values on scale of print and enter the values for a unit of 1 image
quality ,then press "Rgstr" button. (Mode/2.Maintain/4.Printer/5.Adjust head
positions)

H scan Y -*** MB
M -*** MG

¶-47 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Reading scale:
When placed upright for reading numbers, a print shows lines in colors of yellow,
cyan and magenta.
A value where yellow line overlaps with cyan line is Y value.
A value where magenta line overlaps with cyan line is M value.

Yellow

Cyan
Magenta

*In example above, Y is 0 and M is -1

【9】 Read the values on scale of print and enter the values for a unit of 0.1 pixel ,then
press "Rgstr" button.

V scan Y -*** MX
M -***

*See step of main scanning above for reading of values.

¶-48 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-6-2. Replacing cables (HBCN4 assembly (white), HTCN1 assembly (black)),
fluorescent printer head power supply boards, and HEAD-TRM board

1 Unlock the snap lock 8 of the exposure feed


unit. a
Hold the handle 9, and slowly lift the exposure
feed unit.

2 Remove five screws a and remove the


exposure unit top cover b.

3 Remove the cables c (HBCN4 assembly


(white), HTCN1 assembly (black)) from the
connectors, and replace the assemblies
according to the procedures below.

b
POINT

- Change the ferrite core.

¶-49 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
<Replacing the HBCN4 assembly>
f d
(1) Remove the four connectors, and remove
the screw d that secures the clamp.

(2) Remove the HBCN4 assembly r, and


install the new one.

POINT

- When installing the new HBCN4 assembly,


secure the clamp and then connect the
connectors.
e
- Install the ferrite core at a position 50 mm
from the connector on the side on which the 50mm
HEAD-BUF board of the HBCN4 assembly is
installed.

<Replacing the HTCN1 assembly>


f
(1) Remove the connector f, remove the
HTCN1 assembly g, and install the new
one.

(2) Insert the HTCN side of the HTCN1 Assy


to the HTCN1 connector.

¶-50 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
<Replacing the fluorescent printer head
power Supply boards> g

(1) Remove the eight screws (4 for each


board) that secure the fluorescent
printer head power board g, disconnect
the three connectors (BSCN1 to BSCN3, or
GSCN1 to GSCN3), and replace the
boards.
h

<Replacing the HEAD-TRM board>

(1) Remove the four screws that secure the


HEAD-TRM board h, disconnect the two
connectors (HTCN3 and HTCN4), and
replace the board.

4 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

¶-51 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-6-3. Replacing boards (EFU DRIVE board and SCANNER DRIVER board)

1 Remove the exposure unit according to steps


!1
1 through 5 of the procedure explained in "7-
6-1. Replacing exposure unit." !2
!3
2 Remove the pinch rollers !2 and !3 (right and
left) and focus roller !1.

3 Remove four screws a immediately


underneath the exposure unit, and remove the
carrier base Assy b.

NOTE
d
• The carrier base Assy has a sensor. Take a e
extra care when handling the component
and remove the connector c (JP48).
d

c b

4 Remove two screws d and remove the guide g


plate (3) e at lower right of the pinch roller.

5 Remove two screws f on the side and


remove the cover g on the board.
f

¶-52 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6 Remove the locking supports with diagonal
cutting pliers or the like, and replace the EFU
DRIVE board h and scanner drive board i. i

POINT

h
- When mounting the carrier base Assy, fix the
unit at front rightmost position.
- Install the guide (3) pushing to the front
magazine.

NOTE

- If the substrate is removed from the rear of


the unit, the seat is dislocated slightly
according to the manner in which the screw
is set. Therefore, delicate adjustments are
necessary such as bias adjustments.
Do not remove boards from the back of unit.
Follow the procedures above.

7 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

¶-53 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-6-4. Replacing timing belts (two belts)

1 Loosen the two screws a or screws b that


holds down the idler board to loosen the belt
tension.

2 Remove timing belt c or d to replace.

3 Set new belt then turn it several times.


Once it is stabilized, fix by either b or d. b
c

d a
NOTE

• Upon looping a timing belt, the belt is


tightened by a tension spring. A position
indicated by e shows a correct status (belt
is balancing with tension spring).
Tighten the two screws here.

4 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

¶-54 270YE600B
Aug. 2002

fineline6
7-6-5. Greasing cams (Every one year)

1 Remove the components according to steps 1


through 6 of the procedure explained in "7-6-
a
3. Replacing boards (EFU DRIVE board and
scanner drive board)."

2 Wipe off old grease, lift it with the six cams a


upward, and apply Plus Guard No. 2 to the
cam gearsb.

POINT
b
- A small amount (about a size of a small
bean) of Plus Guard No. 2 should be applied
lightly to the whole circumference of each
cam gear.

3 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

7-6-6. Cleaning press-fit sensor

1 Remove the components according to steps 1


to 6 of the procedure explained in "7-6-3.
a
Replacing boards (EFU DRIVE board and
scanner drive board)."

2 Clean the six crimp-style sensors a (2 for


each cam gear) on both sides of the cam gear
with a blower brush.

3 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

¶-55 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-7. Exposure processing section

7-7-1. Replacing PRINTER-CPU board and/or HEAD-BUF board

1 Open the front door, remove the nine screws


a, and remove the PRINTER-CPU board
cover.

2 Replace the PRINTER-CPU board b and/or


HEAD-BUF board c.

<Replacing the HEAD-BUF board> a

(1) Remove the six screws, disconnect the d HEAD-BUF board


four connectors, and replace the HEAD-
BUF board. c

POINT

- Nothing is connected to the upper connector


d (HBCN2).

PRINTER-CPU board
IMPORTANT b

- When replacing the HEAD-BUF board,


confirm the version of the FPGA, and update
the FPGA to the latest version as needed.

<Replacing the PRINTER-CPU board>

(1) Remove the five locking supports,


disconnect the ten connectors, and replace
the PRINTER-CPU board.

IMPORTANT

- When replacing the PRINTER-CPU board,


confirm the versions of the application and
mechanical controller, and download the
latest ones as needed.

3 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

¶-56 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-8. Feeding unit

7-8-1. How to remove feed unit

1 Loosen the thumbscrew b (one screw)* b


completely.

2 Pull out the feeding unit by holding the green


handle (D-1) and green label on shaft (D-2).

*On an earlier-lot product, remove one


thumbscrew a and one screw b, and then
remove the feeding unit.

POINT

- If the feed unit is installed after the exposure unit, the paper exit on the right of the exposure unit
may be deformed.
Deformation of the guide (6) causes the skew of paper.

Guide plate (6)

¶-57 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-8-2. Cleaning rollers and paper transfer surface (Yearly operation)

1 Loosen a thumb screw @1 and open the upper


guide plate. @1

2 Loosen two thumb screws @0, then open and


remove the side guide plate. @0

3 Wipe the whole circumferences of the drive


rollers a and pinch rollers b with a dump cloth
(soak cloth in water and squeeze it firmly).

4 Wipe the paper transfer surface c with a dump


cloth (soak cloth in water and squeeze it
firmly). b

5 Install the removed components exactly as a


before.

c
b

¶-58 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-8-3. Cleaning and replacing sensors

<Cleaning the sensors>

1 Remove the upper guide and the side guide,


and clean the entrance sensor a and exit a
sensor b with a blower brush.

2 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

<Replacing the sensors>


Entrance sensor (side)

1 Remove the upper guide and the side guide,


remove the two screws d that secure the c
entrance sensor c, and replace the sensor.

2 Remove the two screws f that secure the exit


sensor e, and replace the sensor.
d
3 Install the removed components exactly as
before.

Exit sensor (upper)


e

¶-59 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-8-4. Replacing timing belt and applying grease

1 Remove the E-ring a and/or the flange a,


and remove the timing belt.
a

POINT b

- The timing belt can be removed by removing


the E-ring or the flange.

2 Place the new timing belt, and install the flange


and/or the E-ring.
The timing belt does not need any adjustment.

NOTE
Flange
- Install the pulley D with the flange at the rear Pulley D
because it contains a one-way clutch.

However, for the 2 sections c, install the


flange on the near side.

3 Apply Plus Guard No. 2 all over the teeth


(crests and roots) of the seven gears d.

NOTE

- To prevent deterioration of the tension belt, d


be careful not to put Plus Guard No. 2 to the
belt.

4 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

¶-60 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-8-5. Replacing PFU-DRV board

1 Remove the connectors (PFCN1, 2, 3, 6, 7,


a
and 8) and flexible cable (PFCN4 and 5) that
are connected to PFU-DRV board.

2 Remove two screws a and remove the PFU-


DRV board together with the board base.

3 Remove the locking support and replace the


board.

重要!

- When replacing the PFU-DRV board, confirm


the version, and download the device as
needed.

4 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

7-8-6. Replacing fan

1 Remove connector (PFCN8) connected to the


fan.

2 Remove four screws a that hold down the fan,


and replace the fan.

3 Install the removed components exactly as a


before.

¶-61 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-8-7. Replacing print head

1 Remove ink ribbon cassette a.


c a
2 Remove screws b (two for each, 4 screws in
total), remove the print head and replace the
head.

b d
3 After replacing a print head, verify and adjust
printing density by the following procedures:
Check back printing of a test print.
c
Check printing density by the following
procedures as required:
1) Loosen two crews c.
2) Turn knob d.
Turning the knob clockwise makes prints
denser, and turning the knob counter-
clockwise makes prints lighter.
3) Loosen two screws e.
4) Check printing density again.

¶-62 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7-9. Power supply

7-9-1. Replacing power supply (including replacement of PSA board and fan)

1 Remove the two screws a, and remove the


power supply unit cover.

2 Disconnect the connectors (PSCN1 to PSCN3


and PSCN6, and SUJ1 to SUJ3), and remove a
the hexagon head bolt b.

3 Take out the power supply c.

4 Replace the power supply by removing four


screws. (5 power supplies)

¶-63 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
5 Remove six screws and connectors (PSCN7,
8, and 9) for replacing PSA board d.

6 Remove two screws and connector (PSCN9)


for replacing the fan e. d

7 Install the removed components exactly as


before.

¶-64 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
8. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF PROCESSOR SECTION

IMPORTANT:
• Turn off all power sources.
• When unplugging the power cord, make sure that the power has been
completely turned off, and remove the plug from the socket by pulling on the
plug connector section, not the power cable. (Use the same method for
plugging in the unit)
• Before removing circuit boards, switches or sensors in the system, discharge
static electricity from your body by touching other metal part of the system.

8-1. J-module II

8-1-1. Cleaning and replacement procedure for the drum of J module II

If the drive belt does not engage with gear teeth even after a clogging tablet is removed, use the same
procedure.

NOTE

・ Wear protectors (protection glasses, gloves), and turn off the power of processor before
operations. Operation with the power turned on may result in a finger caught in the rotating
drum.
・ If two of the P1, P2, P3, N1, N2, N3, and N4 J modules are cleaned at the same time, the two
modules may be confused with each other, thus causing contamination. Remove the J modules
separately from each other.

【1】Removing the drum unit

1 Reset the cartridge to remove it.

2 Push up the left lever (1).

Lever (1)

•-1 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3 Turn the drum knob with fingers to align the knob and housing (lower) marks.

Housing (lower) mark


Drum knob mark

Drum knob

4 Push down the lever (2).

Lever (2)

5 By holding the housing (upper) at its finger tabs (3), remove it.

Finger tab (3)

6 Lift the drum unit to remove it.

•-2 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7 Check the housings (upper and lower), drum unit sliding surface, pockets, and packing.
If powder from the ECOJET module is deposited, wipe it off using a wet cloth or tissue.
To keep the housing (lower) and drum sensor holes free from dust deposits and clogging,
clean the housing and hole using a cotton swab etc.

Packing

Pocket

Sliding surface

Sensor hole

NOTE

- The housing (upper) and drum can be washed in water. Thoroughly let the housing and drum dry
before reinstalling them.
- Exercise care not to let water enter the housing (lower) sensors.
- If the packing is loose, remove it until the double-coated adhesive tape is exposed and then
apply fresh packing.

•-3 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
8 Align the housing (lower) and knob marks. Reinstall the drum as illustrated below.
(Periodically replace the drum with a new one.)

Drum mark

Note:
The drum and housing have Housing (lower) mark

P1, P2, and P3 labels and Drum knob mark

N1, N2, N3, and N4 labels,


respectively. Do not
confuse these labels with
each other.

Left Right
Orient the narrower part upward as shown Orient the hollow upward as shown
below. below.

9 Reinstall the housing (upper). Pull up the lever (2) to secure the housing after the shaft fits
into place.

!0 Pull down the left lever (1).

!1 In the test mode, detect the drum origin by operating the motor for a drum to which tablets are
to be fed using the ECOJET feeder.
Notes: When choosing a drum origin, match tablets in the cartridge with the drum phase,
referring to Item 2, "Procedure for Checking and Resetting after Maintenance."

•-4 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
【2】Maintenance Precautions and Procedure for Checking and Resetting after Maintenance

・ Be sure to turn off the power before maintaining the J module.


・ Reset the module by doing the following after maintenance.
1) Return the drum to its origin by performing one cycle of operation in the test mode (see the
following note).
2) Visually check the remainder of J tables in the cartridge or confirm the remainder of J tablets
stored in the memory through the display and then correct it.

NOTE

・ If the even-numbered and odd-numbered rows, consisting of remaining tablets in the cartridge,
differ in height, align the drum with an origin, with the drum knob positioned as illustrated below.
Such is the case with modules containing two tablet rows. (If the drum phase is not correspond
to the in-cartridge tablet pattern, an incorrect number of tablets are fed.)
・ If the even-numbered and odd-numbered rows in the P1 and P2 modules are equal in height, the
drum can freely be aligned with an origin for P3 and N4.

No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4

Cartridge

Align the drum with Align the drum with


an origin so that the an origin so that the
drum knob mark drum knob mark
can be viewed. cannot be viewed.

Drum assembly Drum assembly

Drum knob

・Modes for one cycle of origin return


P1J motor test: Mode 226/J motor/P1 additional motor
P2J motor test: Mode 226/J motor/P2 additional motor
P3J motor test: Mode 226/J motor/P3 additional motor

•-5 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
8-1-2. Inspection and replacement procedures for J module II packing ASSY

NOTE

・ Wear protectors (protection glasses, gloves), and turn off the power of processor before
operations. Operation with the power turned on may result in a finger caught in the rotating
drum.
・ Mounting a wrong type of housing (upper) label ASSY may result in contamination of ECOJET.
Remove housing (upper) labels for each type separately.

【1】Remove housing (upper) label ASSY

1 Reset cartridge and then remove cartridge.

2 Hold down the front lever (2).

Lever (2)

3 Hold the finger hook (3) and remove the housing (upper label ASSY.
If drum assembly is not replaced, do not remove the drum assembly.

Finger hook (3)

•-6 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
【2】Inspect packing

If removal, damage, or displacement of left-hand or right-hand part (see example of faults on


packing) is found on existing packing ASSY, replace it with a new one.

<Correctly affixed packing example>


As shown in the photo, no removal or damage must be seen on packing. The left and right edges
of packing ASSY are flush with the both sides of entry opening of housing (upper label) ASSY, or
the packing ASSY must not stick out of the affixing section. If correctly affixed, replacement of the
packing is not required.

Packing ASSY Housing (upper label) ASSY

Surface Back surface

Entry opening Entry opening

Seen from the back, packing is not sticking out.

Packing edges and housing edges are flush with


each other or packing edges are recessed.
Cross-section

<Cross-section of correctly
affixed packing>

Packing edges

Housing (upper) entry


opening side surface.

•-7 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
<Faultily affixed packing example (1)>
If packing Assy lies out of housing (upper), replace the packing even if the lying-out part is scant.

Surface Back surface

<*5> Even if a packing ASSY is sticking out of affixing


section of housing (upper) only slightly, replace the
Cross-section packing with new one.

<Cross-section of affixed
packing example (1)>

Packing edges

Housing (upper) entry opening side surface.

<Faultily affixed packing example (2)>


Even if a packing edge is sticking out of affixing section of housing (upper) only slightly, replace
the packing with new one.

Replace a packing ASSY


separated from the affixing section
packing is separated from the
affixing section of housing (upper).

•-8 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
【3】Removing existing packing

1 Remove existing packing from housing (upper) label ASSY.

Black double-faced tape (adhesive) Existing packing

2 Black double-faced tape or adhesive may remain. Using a flatblade screwdriver, etc., remove
the tape or adhesive with care not to damage the surface of housing (upper) label ASSY.
(A cutting on housing (upper) may affect hermeticity.)

Roll up the double-face tape with a Black double-faced tape was removed.
flatblade screwdriver and remove the tape.

•-9 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
【4】Affixing procedures for packing … Affix with reference to the example of correct affixing

1 Remove the peeling paper on packing on the left edge, press the left edge of packing against
the affixing potion of housing (upper), so that the packing does not stick out.

Peeling paper

2 While peeling off the paper, lightly press the upper and lower potions of the packing against
the channel.

3 Remove the peeling paper completely, pull over and place the right side of the packing on the
affixing potion, so that it does not stick out (use spreading of the packing).

4 Making sure the affixing position, press the packing thoroughly with fingers to completely affix.

5 If the packing sticks out, remove it and then re-affix before completely affixing.
Re-affixing does not cause problems as long as the adhesive is not damaged or wrinkled up
causing any deformation. If the adhesive has been damaged, removed, or wrinkled up
causing deformation, replace the packing with new one.

•-10 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
【5】Mounting housing (upper) label ASSY

1 (Verify type label and the type of J module II, and mount the housing (upper). Put the housing
on the fixing shaft, and hold up the front lever (2) to secure.

After the left and right fixing shafts fit


correctly, pull back the lever (2).

2 Operate the driving motor for charging ECOJET (tablets) on ECOJET charger to return the
drum to its home position.
Return the drum to home position twice to adjust the drum assembly to its original phase.
Then, load the tablet cartridge and return to usual operations.

Select “Maintenance” → “25. processor section” → “256. operation test” → “J motor” to


perform tests on each J motor:
- P1J motor test : P1 charge motor
- P2J motor test : P2 charge motor
- P3J motor test : P3 charge motor

•-11 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
8-2. Checking the paper curls

1 Check paper curl immediately after discharge from the dryer section.

2 When paper curls up within the shaded lines shown in the figure below, the dry
condition of paper is normal.
(The following figure shows the actual size of paper. Actually place the paper on the
figure to confirm the curled condition of paper.)

Feed direction

Direction in which to confirm curling


3

Proper curling range


R8

R200

Excessive curling
(excessive dryness)

Actual size
Less curling
(insufficient dryness)
Place the paper vertical to the drawing and check paper curls. (Do not place the paper
on the horizontal place to check paper curls.)

Notes on checking the paper curls

a Place the paper vertical to the drawings. (Do not place the paper on the horizontal
place.)

• Measuring on paper laid on desk may results in inaccurate measurement.


• Pay attention to the measuring direction against paper carrying direction (see
figure above).

•-12 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
b The paper curl changes according to printing types, even under the same
installation conditions and the same drying temperature conditions.
Check the paper curl under the conditions below, which cause maximum and
minimum paper curl. It is ideal if the paper curl is within the same range under the
conditions below.

- Maximum paper curl: Printing a single sheet under low humidity in dryer section,
and the components such as rollers are sufficiently heated. (Printing a single
sheet after leaving the system under standby status (8 degrees under a specified
temperature) for 30 minutes or more.)
- Minimum paper curl: Continuous printing of multiple sheets under high humidity in
dryer section, and the components such as rollers are not heated enough.
(Continuous printing immediately after the temperature reached a standby level.)

c The paper curls also affects paper alignment in the sorter. Check that paper for
right-side-up alignment and correctness of paper order.

3 If prints in each size do not satisfy the conditions described above, adjust a drying
temperature so that the paper curls are within a same range for prints of all sizes.

•-13 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
9. REPLACING THE BATTERY (PC)

9-1. Replacing the Battery (KIC-1E)

A coin-cell battery (CR2032) powers the real-time clock and CMOS memory. When the computer is
not plugged into a wall socket, the battery has an estimated life of three years. When the computer is
plugged in, the standby current from the power supply extends the life of the battery.
The clock is accurate to ±13 minutes/year at 25 ºC with 3.3 VSB applied.
When the voltage drops below a certain level, the BIOS Setup program settings stored in CMOS RAM
(for example, the date and time) might not be accurate. Replace the battery with an equivalent one.

CAUTION

Risk of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.


Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

To replace the battery, follow these steps:

1 Turn off all peripheral device connected to the computer. Disconnect the computer’s power cord
from the AC power source (wall outlet or power adapter).

2 Remove the computer cover.

3 Locate the battery on the board.

4 With a medium flat-bladed screwdriver, gently pry the battery free from its connector. Note the
orientation of the “+” and “-” on the battery.

5 Install the new battery in the connector, orienting the “+” and “-” correctly.

6 Replace the computer cover.

ª-1 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10. PERIODIC REPLACEMENT PARTS

WARNING / 警 告
Do not eat ECOJET tablets or
drink solutions. In case tablets
or chemicals are swallowed,
rinse mouth with water, drink
one or two cups of water, and
get medical attention
immediately.

万一、誤ってエコジェットや
処理液を飲み込んだ場合には、
直ちに口をすすぎ、コップ1∼
2杯の水を飲み、速やかに医師
の診断を受けて下さい。

Precautions:

When replacing parts, take the following precautions.

■ Turn off the power.


Because you will touch parts inside the machine, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
■ Be on the alert for potential dangers.
Check in advance to see how you can avoid such dangers as getting your hand pinched between
gears.
■ Be on the alert for high-temperature parts.
The drying rack, back printer, etc. reach very high temperatures inside the machine.
Wait until the temperatures cool down before your work on these parts.
■ Handle heavy units carefully
When taking off heavy units, clear the space at your feet, and check carefully to see by which parts
you should hold the units.
■ Handle chemicals carefully.
During your work on the processor, wear goggles and gloves to keep chemicals from getting on the
skin and into the ey

⁄0-1 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Throughout the work described in this chapter, you will often remove gears.
The important points on removing gears are mentioned below. Check them thoroughly in advance.

POINT

• How to remove a gear held by a cir-clip.

Remove the gear by inserting a precision To attach the cir-clip, hold it by hand to the
slotted screwdriver into the gap in the cir-clip. groove in the shaft, and squeeze it in using
(Becareful not to lose the cir-clip.) long nose pliers.

NOTE

・ A removed cir-clip suffers some deterioration of performance. Replace it with a spare cir-
clip when you have one.

• How to remove a gear held by claws.

Using a precision slotted screwdriver, repeat


the action of opening the right and left claws
outward alternately and pulling the gear
simultaneously.
(To attach the gear, push the gear hole over
the shaft.)

NOTE

・ When attaching the gear, check to see that the two claws are held securely in the shaft
groove as illustrated below.

⁄0-2 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
POINT

• How to remove a retaining ring (plastic)

Remove the retaining ring by holding part a between pliers.

NOTE

・A removed retaining ring suffers some deterioration of performance. Do not recycle it.

⁄0-3 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
● Yearly replacement parts

Qty./unit
Total
Part No. Part name Processing rack No. Crossover rack No. Page
qty. Inlet Squ. Dry
1 2 3 4 5 rack 2 3 4 5 rack rack

385002426A Bearing 56 4 8 8 8 8 20 ⁄0-21

Water absorbing
385002407B 2 2 ⁄0-22
roller

385002416B Idler gear 1 1 ⁄0-22

Idler gear
3850A2408C 3 3 ⁄0-23
assembly

385002215B Gear 2 2 ⁄0-23

251602602A Roller (C) 1 1 ⁄0-24

● Two-yearly replacement parts

Qty./unit
Total
Part No. Part name Processing rack No. Crossover rack No. Page
qty. Inlet Squ. Dry
1 2 3 4 5 rack 2 3 4 5 rack rack

Timing belt
AAAA90200171 1 ⁄0-26
(processor drive shaft)

385002214A Gear 4 1 1 1 1 ⁄0-28

385002216B Gear 24 2 1 5 5 5 5 3 ⁄0-30

Idler gear
355002635B 5 1 1 1 1 1 ⁄0-32
(C)
Idler gear
355002221B 5 1 1 1 1 1 ⁄0-33
(A)

AAAA90100184 Bearing 1 1 ⁄0-34

AAAA90100185 Bearing 1 1 ⁄0-35

385002215B Gear 67 12 12 12 12 12 1 6 ⁄0-36

Loading
355002444A 4 2 2 ⁄0-38
spring (A)
Idler gear
355002425B 4 1 1 1 1 ⁄0-39
(B)
Loading
355002446A 4 4 ⁄0-40
spring (C)

⁄0-4 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Qty./unit
Total
Part No. Part name Processing rack No. Crossover rack No. Page
qty. Inlet Squ. Dry
1 2 3 4 5 rack 2 3 4 5 rack rack

Filter retainer
385001006A 5 ⁄0-41
(temperature control bath)
Anti-evapo-
3850A2202A 5 1 1 1 1 1 ⁄0-42
ration cover
Helical
385002212B 30 6 6 6 6 6 ⁄0-42
wheel (left)
Helical
396033127B 5 1 1 1 1 1 ⁄0-43
wheel (right)

355002232A Worm gear 35 7 7 7 7 7 ⁄0-46

Thrust
355002227A 5 1 1 1 1 1 ⁄0-47
washer
Loading
355002260A 25 5 5 5 5 5 ⁄0-48
spring
Loading
355002230A 25 5 5 5 5 5 ⁄0-49
spring
Loading
355002232A 10 2 2 2 2 2 ⁄0-50
spring 121

355002229B Bearing 60 12 12 12 12 12 ⁄0-51

355002251A Gear (E) 15 3 3 3 3 3 ⁄0-52

355002213A Gear 15 3 3 3 3 3 ⁄0-52

355002230B Bearing 15 3 3 3 3 3 ⁄0-53

355002234B Bearing 10 2 2 2 2 2 ⁄0-54

● Three-yearly Replacement Parts

Qty./unit
Total
Part No. Part name Processing rack No. Crossover rack No. Page
qty. Inlet Squ. Dry
1 2 3 4 5 rack 2 3 4 5 rack rack

Rubber
385002401A 2 1 1 ⁄0-55
roller (A)
Rubber
385002432A 3 3 ⁄0-56
roller (B)
Loading
385002445B 16 4 4 4 4 ⁄0-57
spring (B)

⁄0-5 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
● Miscellaneous Parts

Qty./unit
Total
Part No. Part name Processing rack No. Crossover rack No. Page
qty. Inlet Squ. Dry
1 2 3 4 5 rack 2 3 4 5 rack rack

385002412A
Hook 10 2 2 2 2 2 ⁄0-58
385002413A
270002016C Diffuser film Input station
⁄0-59
270002018C light guide (must be cleaned every three months).

⁄0-6 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
● Drawing showing yearly replacement parts

<Inlet rack>

385002426A
Bearing

385002426A
Bearing

⁄0-7 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
<Crossover rack>

385002426A
Bearing

385002432A
Rubber roller (B)

385002426A
Bearing

385002426A
Bearing

385002426A
Bearing

⁄0-8 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
<Squeeze rack>

385002426A
Bearing
385002407B
Water
absorbing
385002416B
Idler gear

385002426A
Bearing

385002426A
Bearing

3850A2408C
Idler gear assembly

385002426A
Bearing

385002426A
Bearing

⁄0-9 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
<Drying rack>

385002215B
Gear
(2 on squeegee drive)

251002602A
Roller (C)
(1 at entrance to rack)

⁄0-10 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
● Drawing showing two-yearly replacement parts

<Temperature control bath>

385001006A
Filter retainer
(temperature
control tank)

⁄0-11 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
<Processor>

AAAA90200171
Timing belt
(processor
drive shaft)

⁄0-12 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
<Processing rack>

Processing rack No. 1: A+B


Processing rack No. 2 ∼ 4: A+C C
355002635B
Processing rack No. 5: A
Gear (C)

A 355002221B
355002230A
Idler gear (A)
Loading spring
355002234B (5 per rack)
Bearing 355002260A
Loading spring
(5 per rack)
B 3850002216B
Gear

396033127B AAAA90100184 AAAA90100185


Helical wheel (right) Bearing Bearing

355002635B
Gear (C)
385002212B
Helical wheel (left)) 355002221B
(6 per rack) Idler gear (A)

355002232A
Worm gear
355002251B
Gear (E)

355002234B
Bearing

385002230B
Bearing
355002229A
355002232A Bearing
Worm gear (36 per rack)

385002213A
251602213A Gear
Loading spring 121

355002227A 385002214A
Thrust Gear
washer

385002230B
Bearing

355002234B
Bearing 251602213A
Loading spring 121 385002215B
Gear
(12 per rack)

⁄0-13 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
<Processing rack (guides)>

3850A2202A
Anti-evapo- ration cover(A)Assy

⁄0-14 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
<Inlet rack>

355002444A
Loading spring (A)

385002215B
Gear

385002216B
Gear

355002444A
Loading spring (A)

⁄0-15 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
<Crossover rack>

255002425B
Idler gear (B)

385002216B
Gear

385002216B
Gear

385002216B
Gear

⁄0-16 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
<Squeeze rack>

355002446A
385002215B Loading spring (C)
Gear

355002446A
Loading spring (C)
385002216B
Gear
355002444A
Loading spring (A)

355002444A
Loading spring (A)

⁄0-17 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
● Drawing showing three-yearly replacement parts

<Inlet rack>

385002401A
Rubber roller (A)

⁄0-18 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
<Crossover rack>

255002445B
Loading spring (B))

255002445B
Loading spring (B)

⁄0-19 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
<Squeeze rack>

385002401A
Rubber roller (A))

385002432A
Rubber roller (B)

⁄0-20 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
● How to replace yearly replacement parts

10-1. Procedure for replacing bearing (385002426A)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Replace roller bearings a on the inlet rack,
crossover racks, and squeeze rack. (Although
one crossover rack is shown right as an
example, you can replace the parts on the
other racks in the same manner.) a

2 The bearings are secured with either retaining


rings (plastic) b or gears c as shown in the
figure.
Read "Point" in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removing a retaining ring and a gear.

3 After changing the bearing, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse orders of the b
steps performed for removal.
c

NOTE

・No retaining rings must be recycled.

⁄0-21 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-2. Procedure for replacing water-absorbing roller (385002407B)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the squeeze rack.


b
a
2 Take off turn guide a.

3 Remove the bearing and gear holding water-


absorbing roller b by consulting "10-1.
Procedure for replacing bearing."

4 Take off and replace the water-absorbing


roller.

5 After changing the water-absorbing roller,


reattach the parts where they were in the
reverse order of the steps performed for
removal.

10-3. Procedure for replacing idler gear (385002416B)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the squeeze rack.


a
2 Remove the cir-clip holding idler gear
assembly a.
(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.)

3 Replace idler gear a.

4 After changing the idler gear, reattach the


parts where they were in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal.

⁄0-22 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-4. Procedure for replacing idler gear assembly (3850A2408C)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the squeeze rack.

2 Remove the cir-clips holding idler gear


assembly a.
(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.)

3 Replace the idler gear assembly.

4 After changing idler gear assembly, reattach


the parts where they were in the reverse order
of the steps performed for removal.
a

10-5. Procedure for replacing gear (385002215B)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the drying rack.

2 Replace gears a.

3 Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on


removal. a

4 After changing the gear, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

⁄0-23 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-6. Procedure for replacing roller (C) (251602602A)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the drying rack.

2 Unlock the claws by pushing the springs


inward to the right and left sides, and take off
guide (1) a.

NOTE

・ When attaching guide (1), make sure


that it is locked securely into position.

3 Remove four screws b holding duct a.

4 Take off duct a.

5 Take off the drying nozzle by pushing two


drying nozzle claws a and b inward (one at
the top and the other at the bottom).

NOTE

・ When attaching the drying nozzle, make


sure that the retaining claws are locked
securely into position.

⁄0-24 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6 Remove helical wheel a by opening the claws
in the shaft hole outward.

7 Remove loading spring b and bearing c.

8 Take out the inner rubber roller through the


hole from which you removed the drying
nozzle.
Take the outer roller off and outside.

9 After changing the roller, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

NOTE

・ Remember to check the roller ratchets.

⁄0-25 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
● How to replace two-yearly replacement parts

10-7. Procedure for replacing timing belt (rack drive shaft) (AAAA90200171)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Remove three screws a.

2 Take off timing belt cover b.

3 Loosen three screws c after marking their


positions.

4 Lift up motor b, and disconnect timing belt e


from sprocket f.

5 After changing the timing belt, reattach the


parts where they were in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal. e

6 Adjust the timing belt tension by consulting the f


next page.

⁄0-26 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
●Specifications for Adjusting Timing Belt Tension

5
Standard value Partly tighten motor, apply approximately a 4.9 N (0.5 kgf)
0. (for a guide)
4.5
±
load to it (using a weight or other similar instrument), and
n d:
Be fully tighten it. Hand-operated shaft mount
(frame) square hole. 4.9 N (0.5 kgf) load.

Load: 9.8±0.49 N (1±0.05)

Direction of rotation of
driving

Direction of application of load to belt.


Motor-holding screw Motor-holding screw

⁄0-27 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-8. Procedure for replacing gear (385002214A)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the processing rack.

2 Remove screw a from the inside, and take off


bearing holder b.
a Remove this screw
to take off the
bearing holder.

3 By pressing anti-evaporation cover c against


one of the side plates, let the two pins out of c
the groove in the side plate.

NOTE

・ Only when you take off the P1 rack anti-


evaporation cover, remove the driving shaft
side inlet shaft using an Allen wrench as
illustrated below.

Inlet shaft

⁄0-28 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4 By pushing claw d, take off anti-evaporation
cover e.

d
NOTE
e
・ When removing the anti-evaporation cover,
pull it out straight. Pulling it out obliquely will
break the claws.

5 Take off gears f.


(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.) Also remove the bearings and
loading springs.

6 Move embossed roller (A) g and roller (E) h


toward you, and take off gear i. h
7 After changing the gears, reattach the parts
where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

⁄0-29 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-9. Procedure for replacing gear (385002216B)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

■Processing rack No. 1

1 Take off processing rack No. 1.


a Remove this screw
2 Remove screw a from the inside, and take off
to take off the
bearing holder b.
bearing holder.

3 Remove the cir-clip holding gear c.


(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.)

4 After changing the gear, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse order of the b
steps performed for removal.

⁄0-30 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
■Inlet rack

1 Take off the inlet rack.

2 Remove gear a.
(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.)

3 After changing the gear, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

■Crossover rack

1 Take off the crossover rack.

2 Remove gear a.
(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.)

3 After changing the gear, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

■Squeeze rack

1 Take off the squeeze rack.

2 Remove gear a.
(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.)

3 After changing the gear, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

⁄0-31 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-10. Procedure for replacing idler gear (C) (355002635B)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the processing rack.

2 Remove the cir-clip holding idler gear (C) a


on the inside of the processing rack.
(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.)

3 After changing the idler gear, reattach the a


parts where they were in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal.

⁄0-32 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-11. Procedure for replacing idler gear (A) (355002221B)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the P1 rack.

2 Remove screw a from the inside, and take off


bearing holder b.
a Remove this screw
to take off the
3 Remove the cir-clip holding idler gear (A) c.
(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on bearing holder.
removal.)

4 After changing the idler gear, reattach the


parts where they were in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal.

⁄0-33 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-12. Procedure for replacing bearing (AAAA90100184)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the P1 rack.

2 Remove the screw from the inside, and take


off bearing holder a.

3 Take off idler gear (A) b by consulting "10-11.


Procedure for replacing idler gear (A)."

4 Replace bearing c in the hole in the shaft to


which idler gear (C) was attached previously.

5 After changing the bearing, reattach the parts Remove this screw to
where they were in the reverse order of the
take off the bearing
steps performed for removal.
holder.

⁄0-34 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-13. Procedure for replacing bearing (AAAA90100185)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the P1 rack.

2 Remove the screw from the inside, and take


off bearing holder a.

3 Replace bearing b attached to the bearing


holder. b

4 After changing the bearing, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

NOTE

・ The bearing must be attached in the right


direction. Attach it correctly by consulting the
figure below.

⁄0-35 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-14. Procedure for replacing gear (385002215B)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

■Processing rack

1 Take off the processing rack.

2 Remove gear a.
(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.)
a
3 After changing the gear, reattach the parts
where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

■Inlet rack

1 Take off the inlet rack.

2 Remove gear a.
(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.)

3 After changing the gear, reattach the parts a


where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

⁄0-36 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
■Squeeze rack

1 Take off the squeeze rack. a


a
2 Remove gear a.
(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.)

3 After changing the gear, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

⁄0-37 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-15. Procedure for replacing loading spring (A) (355002444A)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

■Inlet rack

1 Take off the inlet rack.

2 Remove gear a.
(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.)

a
3 Disconnect loading spring b. b

4 After changing the loading spring, reattach the


parts where they were in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal.

■Squeeze rack

1 Take off the squeeze rack.

2 Remove gears c.
(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.)

3 Disconnect loading springs d.

d c

4 Also disconnect loading springs e on the


other side of the rack.

5 After changing the loading springs, reattach


the parts where they were in the reverse order
of the steps performed for removal.

⁄0-38 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-16. Procedure for replacing idler gear (B) (355002425B)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.
■Crossover rack

1 Take off the crossover rack.

2 Remove gear a.
(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.)

3 After changing the gear, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

⁄0-39 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-17. Procedure for replacing loading spring (C) (355002446A)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the squeegeeing rack.

2 Open the gear a retaining claws outward, and


take off gear a. (Read "Point" in page ⁄0-2 for
the details on removal.)

3 Remove loading springs (C) b.

a
a

4 Also disconnect loading spring (C) d on the


other side of the rack.

5 After changing the loading spring, reattach the


c
parts where they were in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal.

⁄0-40 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-18. Procedure for replacing filter retainer (temperature control bath) (385001006A)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the top cover on the processor.

2 Turn the filer shaft until the two arrows in the


stickers, one on filter unit a and the other on
the tank, face each other.

3 Pull out filter unit a slowly.


(Be careful not to jerk the filer unit, or the
solution may spill out and cause contami-
nation.)

4 Replace filter holder b b

5 After changing the filter holder, reattach the P3-3


parts where they were in the reverse order of
P3-2
the steps performed for removal.
P3-1
P2
P1

⁄0-41 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-19. Procedure for replacing anti-evaporation cover (3850A2202A)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the processing rack.


a
2 Press anti-evaporation cover a against one of
the side plates, and let the two pins out of the
groove in the other side plate.

3 After changing the anti- evaporation cover,


reattach the parts where they were in the
reverse order of the steps performed for
removal.

NOTE

・ Only when you take off the P1 rack anti-


evaporation cover, remove the driving shaft
side inlet shaft using an Allen wrench as
illustrated below.

Inlet shaft.

10-20. Procedure for replacing helical wheel (left) (385002212B)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the processing rack.

2 Remove helical wheels (left) a.


(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.)

3 After changing the helical wheels, reattach the


parts where they were in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal.
a

⁄0-42 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-21. Procedure for replacing helical wheel (right) (396033127B)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the processing rack.

2 By pushing claw a, take off anti-evaporation


cover b.
a
b

NOTE

・ When removing the anti-evaporation cover,


pull it out straight. Pulling it out obliquely will
break the claws.

3 Take off the various guides around bearing c


(halfway down the rack) in advance, so you
can gain easy access to the two screws
holding the bearing.

4 Remove two screws d to set bearing c


(halfway down the rack) free.

⁄0-43 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
5 Take off U-turn guide e at the bottom of the
processing rack.

6 Remove four screws f holding the rack


frame, and take off the frame.

7 Remove two screws g holding the bearing (at


the very bottom), and take off the driving shaft.

⁄0-44 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
8 Remove bearing and spacer h.

9 Firmly push down helical wheel (right) i with h


built-in torque limiter, and pull out pin j.
j
Replace the helical wheel (right). But, while
you do this, grease the wheel according to the
following procedure.
i

!0 Replace the helical wheel (right). While doing


this, apply grease to inner surface k.

!1 Attach the parts as they were before in the


reverse order of the steps performed for
removal.

⁄0-45 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-22. Procedure for replacing worm gear (355002232A)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the processing rack.

2 Remove the driving shaft according to "10-21.


Procedure for replacing helical wheel (right)
(396033127B)."

3 Remove self-tapping screw b holding worm


gears a, and remove the worm gears.

4 After changing the worm gears, reattach the


parts where theywere in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal. a
b

⁄0-46 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-23. Procedure for replacing thrust washer (355002227A)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the processing rack.

2 Remove the driving shaft according to "10-21.


Procedure for replacing helical wheel (right)
(396033127B)."

3 Remove bearing a, and remove thrust washer


b.

4 After changing the thrust washer, reattach the


parts where they were in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal.

b
a

⁄0-47 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-24. Procedure for replacing loading spring (355002260A)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the processing rack.

2 Remove gear a first.


(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.) Disconnect the loading spring next.

3 After changing the loading spring, reattach the


parts where they were in the reverse order of
a
the steps performed for removal.

⁄0-48 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-25. Procedure for replacing loading spring (355002230A)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the processing rack.

2 When the loading spring is fitted with a gear,


remove gear a first.
(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.) Disconnect the loading spring next.

3 When the loading gear is fitted only with


a
bearing b, disconnect the loading spring with
the bearing in place.

4 After changing the loading spring, reattach the


parts where they were in the reverse order of
the steps performed for removal.

⁄0-49 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-26. Procedure for replacing loading spring 121 (251602213A)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.
1 Take off the processing rack.

2 Remove gears a first.


(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.) Disconnect the loading springs next.

3 After changing the loading springs, reattach


the parts where they were in the reverse order
of the steps performed for removal.

⁄0-50 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-27. Procedure for replacing bearing (355002229A)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the processing rack.

2 Remove gears a.
(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.)
c
3 Disconnect loading springs b. a

4 Remove bearings c.

5 After changing the bearings, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal. b

NOTE

・ To take off the driving shaft side gears, you


need to take off the driving shaft in advance.
For the details on how to take off the driving
shaft, read "10-21. Procedure for replacing
helical wheel (right) (396033127B)."
b

⁄0-51 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-28. Procedure for replacing gear E (355002251A)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the processing rack.

2 Remove gears a.
(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.)

3 Remove gears (E) b. b


(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.)
a
4 After changing the gears, reattach the parts
where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

10-29. Procedure for replacing gear (355002213A)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the processing rack.

2 Remove gears a.
(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.)

3 After changing the gears, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

⁄0-52 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-30. Procedure for replacing bearing (355002230A)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the processing rack.

2 Take off the driving shaft and worm gears


according to "10-22. Procedure for replacing
worm gears (335002232A)."

3 Remove bearings a.

4 After changing the bearings, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

⁄0-53 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-31. Procedure for replacing bearing (355002234B)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the processing rack.

2 Take off the driving shaft and worm gears


according to "10-22. Procedure for replacing
worm gears (355002232A)."

3 Remove bearings a.

4 After changing the bearings, reattach the parts


where they were in the reverse order of the
steps performed for removal.

⁄0-54 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
● How to replace three-yearly replacement parts

10-32. Procedure for replacing rubber roller (A) (385002401A)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the squeegeeing rack.

2 Open the gear a retaining claws outward, and


remove gear a. Read "Point" in page ⁄0-2 for
the details on removing a gear.

3 Remove bearing b and loading spring c.

b c

4 Using long nose pliers, remove retaining ring


d on the other side. Read "Point" in page ⁄0-2
e
for the details on how to remove a retaining
ring.
f

5 Remove bearing e and loading spring f.

6 Pull out rubber rollers (A) g, and replace


them. g

7 After replacing the rubber rollers, attach the


various parts as they were before in the
reverse order order of the steps performed for
removal.

NOTE

・No retaining rings must be recycled.

⁄0-55 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-33. Procedure for replacing rubber roller (B) (385002432A)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the squeegeeing rack.

2 Open the gear a retaining claws outward, and


remove gear a. Read "Point" in page ⁄0-2 for
the details on removing a gear.

3 Remove bearing b and loading spring c.

4 Using long nose pliers, remove retaining ring


e
d on the other side. Read "Point" in page ⁄0-2
for the details on how to remove a retaining
ring.

5 Remove bearing e and loading spring f.

d f

6 Pull out rubber rollers (B) g, and replace


them. g

7 After replacing the rubber rollers, attach the


various parts as they were before in the
reverse order order of the steps performed for
removal.

NOTE

・No retaining rings must be recycled.

⁄0-56 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-34. Procedure for replacing loading spring (B) (355002445B)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.
Consult the drawings in pages ⁄0-7 to ⁄0-21 for the exact location of the part.

1 Take off the crossover rack.

2 Remove gears a.
(Read “Point” in page ⁄0-2 for the details on
removal.)

3 Disconnect loading springs (B)b.

4 After changing the loading springs, reattach


the parts where they were in the reverse order
of the steps performed for removal.

b
a
b
a b

⁄0-57 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
● Miscellaneous Parts

10-35. Procedure for replacing hooks (385002413A and 385002412A)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.

1 Take off the entrance rack or crossover rack.


(A crossover rack is shown here for illustration, a
but the entrance rack hooks can be replaced
by the same procedure.)

2 Remove hook a. Because it is held very


tightly, insert a screwdriver into the gap
between hook and rack, and remove the hook
by using the screwdriver as if to open the gap
wider.

3 To attach the hook, put the hook bump into


one hole, and force the other end in.

⁄0-58 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10-36. Procedure for cleaning diffuser film (top) (270002016C) and light
guide (top side) (270002018C)

Before starting your work, be sure to turn off the power for your personal safety.

1 Open the front cover at the lower part of Film


Scanner. 1

2 Completely loosen both 1. Pull the green


handle forward, and guide the light source by
hand when removing.

3 Loosen 2.
Rotate 3 90。.
Completely loosen both 4.
Push the light source cover a inwards and
remove it.

4 Clean diffuser film (a) and light guide (b) using


the Konica-recommended cleaner. Insert the
diffuser film with the cut edge first and left
(smooth side up).
2
3
5 After cleaning the diffuser and light guide,
attach the various parts as they were before in
the order of the steps performed for removal.

⁄0-59 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
NOTE
Insert direction
・ Set the diffuser film with the cut edge Cut side
in the same direction as the cut light
guide edge (smooth side up).

Cut side

Diffusion film

Remove direction

⁄0-60 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
11. APPLICATION DATA BACKUP AND RELOADING PROCEDURES

11-1. Backing up Data

NOTE

- Normally, data used in the application is automatically backed up at the previous day and the
day before previous day.
To be prepared for a hard disk crush or the other worst cases, backing up data on regular basis
is highly recommended.
This section describes the procedure for backing up information on to floppy disk drive A.
Two 1.4MB-formatted empty FDs (for input and for printer) are required.
Use the same procedure for backing up information on to another external drive (medium).

11-1-1. Input station (When backing up the data to the A drive on the FD drive:)

(1) From the input station home screen, select [Setup], [15 Data management], and then [151
Creat backup data].
(2) Follow the procedure shown below on the data backup display.
Set a 3.5-inch FD (1.4MB formatted) in the FD drive.
1 Select [Input station] tag.
2 Select [a: drive] on [backup destination selection] list box.
3 Select [No] on compression selection.
4 Uncheck the boxes shown below using the scroll bar on the Equipment data item.
(Because data cannot be stored in one FD)
- 135 AFC carrier setting
- 240 AFC carrier setting
- Universal film carrier setting
5 Click [Create backup data] button.

1 2 3

⁄1-1 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6 Click [Yes] on the backup start confirmation display to execute the backup.

NOTE

- The DS-1000 application data is backed up in a folder, A:¥Backup.

⁄1-2 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
11-1-2. Backing up the printer data (When backing up the data to the A drive on the FD drive:)

(1) From the input station home screen, select [Setup], [15 Data management], and then [151
Creat backup data].
(2) Follow the procedure shown below on the data backup display.
Set a 3.5-inch FD (1.4MB formatted) in the FD drive of the input station
1 Select [Printer unit] tag.
2 Select [a: drive] on [backup destination selection] list box.
3 Select [Yes] on compression selection.
4 Confirm the all boxes are checked.
5 Click [Create backup data] button.

1 2 3

6 Click [Yes] on the backup start confirmation display to execute the backup.

NOTE

- The DS-1000 application data is backed up in a folder, A:¥Backup¥dp1.

⁄1-3 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
<For the versions up to V1.02, the procedure in (3) below is necessary>

(3) Carry out the following operation on the Reading and writing of inter-pixel correction value
screen of the printer.
Set the FD used in item (2) in the FD drive of the printer.
1 Select Mode→2.maintain→4.Printer→Down arrow(↓)→9.Read/Write pixel correction
form the printer LCD panel.
2 Execute Write processing by pressing "Write to FD".
3 When Write processing is completed, return control to the home screen by pressing the
Return button.
4 Remove the FD from the FD drive of the printer.

⁄1-4 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
11-2. Retrieving Data Backed up

NOTE

- This part will explain the steps for retrieving the data backed up in the previous part and for
rewriting the data to a folder which is used on the normal application operation.
The same procedure can be used for restoring data from another external drive (medium).

11-2-1. Retrieval the data backed up from the input station


(When retrieving the data from the A drive on the FD drive:)

(1) From the input station home screen, select [15 Data management], and then [152 Data
restore].
(2) Follow the procedure shown below on the data call display.
1 Select [Input station] tag.
2 Select [a: drive] on [backup destination selection] list box.
3 A list of the data when the files were backed up is displayed on [Select file] column.
(When two or more data are backed up, select the desired list from two or more lists
displayed.)
4 After confirming that the date of data is right, click [Access file list] button.
5 Click [Restore] button.

1 2 3 4

When the desired file is not


found in the selected drive, the
error message will appear.

⁄1-5 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6 Click [Yes] on the backup start confirmation display to execute the backup.

NOTE

- The data is copied from the A:¥Backup folder to the folder (now) of the DS-1000
application for restoration. Caution is necessary for execution of the program since
data is overwritten to the now folder currently being used.

(3) Restarting the input station


1 Click [Quite] button on the home screen to quite the application.
2 Turn the input station breaker to off, and wait until the shut down process finishes.
3 Turn the input station breaker to on to restart the input station.
*After restarting the input station is completed, the data retrieved is operable.

⁄1-6 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
11-2-2. Retrieval the data backed up from the printer
(When retrieving the data from the A drive on the FD drive:)

(1) From the input station home screen, select [15 Data management], and then [152 Data
restore].
(2) Follow the procedure shown below on the data call display.
1 Select [Printer unit] tag.
2 Select [a: drive] on [backup destination selection] list box.
3 A list of the data when the files were backed up is displayed on [Select file] column.
(When two or more data are backed up, select the desired list from two or more lists
displayed.)
4 After confirming that the date of data is right, click [Access file list] button.
5 Click [Restore] button.

1 2 3 4

When the desired file is not


found in the selected drive, the
error message will appear.

6 Click [Yes] on the backup start confirmation display to execute the backup.

NOTE

- Data is copied for recovery via network, from A:¥Backup¥dp1 folder to the data folder
(now) of DS-1000 application. Caution is necessary for execution of the program since
data is overwritten to the now folder currently being used.

⁄1-7 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
<For the versions up to V1.02, the procedure in (3) below is necessary>

(3) Carry out the following operation on the Reading and writing of inter-pixel correction value
screen of the printer.
Set the FD that was backed up in Section 11-1-2. to the FD drive of the printer.
1 Select Mode → 2.Maintenance→ 4.Printer unit→ 9.Reading and writing of inter-pixel
correction value from the printer LCD panel.
2 Execute Write processing by pressing "Load on to FD".
3 After loading processing is completed, return control to the home screen by pressing
the Return button.
4 Remove the FD from the FD drive of the printer.

(4) Restarting the printer


1 Press the pause button to switch the pause display.
2 Press the restart button.
*After restarting the printer is completed, the data retrieved is operable.

⁄1-8 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
12. R1 SUPER VERSION UP PROCEDURE FOR DS-1000 & DP-1000
[Purpose]
1. To make troubleshooting for the current software version.
2. To install the option software such as CD-R writing, Digital-ICE and Red eye correction. But the
hardware key is needed to use the functions.

[Tools]
CD-ROM : R1 Super DS-1000 System E V1.03R01 (E)
CD-ROM : R1 Super DP-1000 System J/E V1.03R01

[Version up Procedure Flow]

1. Pre-check before version up

1) Print out for master chart, head calibration, and various print

2) Data backup (Input station and Printer)

2. Input Station Application software version up

1) DS-1000 System Software decompression

2) Version up of ES-2200 Driver

3) Version up of AFC firmware

3. Printer Application software version up procedure

1) Version of DP-1000 Software

2) Version up of Printer-CPU

3) Version up of LCD Information

4) Version up of Maintenance chart data for DP-1000

4. Post-check after version up

1) Confirmation of version (Input station, Printer)

2) Film scanner setup


3) Head calibration, 4) Master channel setup, 5) Various print

6) Data backup Input station

⁄2-1 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
[Procedure Details for upgrading DS-1000 & DP-1000]

1) Pre-check before version up


1) Print Master Channel test chart
・ Mode: 1. Setup → 12 Individual setup → 125 Correct master channel color
・ Print master channel chart for checking after version up.
2) Print Head Calibration test chart
・ Mode: 1. Setup → 12 Individual setup → 124 Head calibration
・ Print Head Calibration chart for checking after version up.
3) Confirm various print:
・ Print sample prints for checking after version up.
(e.g.)
・ 135 negative film: 3R or 4R
・ Digital still camera: 3R or 4R
・ Print to Print: 3R or 4R
4) Input Station data backup
a) 1.Setup → 15 Manage data → 151 Create backup data copy
b) Confirm that tag is Input Station
c) Check "Specify to which" is C:\.
d) Click Create backup copy button. Click the YES button on the message that appears.
(Backup folder will be created in C:\Temp folder.)
5) Printer data backup
e) 1.Setup → 15 Manage data → 151 Create backup data copy
f) Confirm that tag is printer
g) Check "Specify to which" is C:\.
h) Click Create backup copy button. Click the YES button on the message that appears.
(Backup folder will be created in C:\Temp folder.)
2) Input Station Application software version up
1) Quit Input Station Application Software
a) Click Quit button in home screen.
b) Click Quit button in closing screen.
c) If Post-operation check screen appears, click Cancel and quit.
2) Log on as the Administrator
a) "Ctrl"+"Alt"+"Del" to go to security of Windows.
b) Select "Log off"
c) Put "administrator" on User ID, and "konica" or no password on password
d) Click "OK".
3) Uncompress application file for DS-1000 System.
a) Double click "DS1000V103R01(E)" in the CD.
CD\DS1000V103R01E.EXE
Confirm target is C:\ and click OK button.
4) Setting for registry
a) Insert "R1 Super System V1.03R01(E)" CD to CD-ROM drive.
b) Open Explorer and Double click "r1Super.reg"
CD\Regset\ r1Super.reg
c) Click "OK" on the confirmation message. When the success message comes, the setting
is completed.
5) Login as Administrator
a) Display task bar by clicking on the "Windows" key on the full size keyboard.
b) From the taskbar, Select Start → Shut down.
c) Select "Restart" and click OK button.
*Do not press "Shift" key during the PC is restoring.
d) Click Quit button in home screen.
e) Click Quit button in closing screen.
f) If Post-operation check screen appears, click cancel and quit.
g) Log on as the Administrator as usual way.

⁄2-2 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6) Recognition for CD-ROM.
a) Insert "R1 Super System V1.03R01(E)" CD to CD-ROM drive.
b) Double click CDROMEnable-E.
CD\ shortcut of CDROMEnable-E
When the error message comes up, click "OK" and retry it.

c) If the screen appears, adjust writing speed to meet the writing speed of work drive. (40X
speed in the following example)
Click "Previous".

7) ES-2200 Flat bed scanner driver version up


a) Refer to the procedure for ES-2200 scanner driver version up
8) Restart the Input station
a) Display task bar by clicking on the "Windows" key on the full size keyboard.
b) From the taskbar, Select Start → Shut down.
c) Select "Restart" and click OK button.
9) AFC firmware version up
From the Home screen select Maintenance → 26 Version up
a) Confirm that referring file is "AFC103r1.mot." If not, click Select file button and look for the
right one.

V103r1

b) Check AFC column and click download button.


(It takes around 6 min to complete.)

⁄2-3 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
10) Delete the print size "4 x 11.5"
(Note: The print size "4 x 10" is installed instead of "4 x11.5" because the print size indication is
not correct on the current version.)
From the Home screen select 1. Setup → 16 Set parameters → 162 Set print size
a) Double click the "Normal Print" folder
b) Click "4 x 11.5".

c) Click "Delete".
d) Click "Yes" after the note message "NOTE-L175-0".
e) Click "Registration".
f) Click "Home" to go to home screen.

⁄2-4 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3) Printer Application software version up procedure
1) Printer software version up
a) Insert "R1 Super DP-1000 System J/E V1.03R01" CD to CD-ROM drive on the Input
station's PC.
b) From the Home screen, select 2.Maintenance → 26 Version up
c) Select printer tab (DpXX)
*Don't press 'Shift' key during the PC is restarting.
d) Click "Select File" button in APL column to select download file and Click "Open".
CD¥Printer¥ v103r01.inf. (Because data is bulky, two files must be downloaded. Be sure to
selectcorrect files.)
e) Check "File load" and "Upgrade" In the APL column
f) Check "Upgrade" In the MCTL and Resource column.

c d

e v103r01.inf v103r01.inf

g) Click "execution" button.


h) Once Start-up message "NOTE L191-0" appeared, click "Yes".
i) Once remote menu of application software version up appears, select "V103R01T1.inf" and
click start button.
(It takes around 3 min to complete.)
Click "Back" after finish upgrading.

v103r01.inf

⁄2-5 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
j) Select Printer CPU (MCTL)
Choose "Mctl103R1.mot" and click start button.
(It takes around 6 min to complete.)

Click "Back" after finish upgrading.

Mctl103R1.mot

k) Select LCD Information


Choose "English" or "Japanese" and click start button.
(It takes around 2 min to complete.)

Click "Back" after finish upgrading.

⁄2-6 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
l) Click "Back" button. It will review to the version up screen.
m) Select printer tab (DpXX)
n) Click "Select File" button in APL column to select download file and click "Open".
CD\Printer\ v103chart.inf
o) Check "File load" and "Upgrade" In the APL column.
p) Uncheck "Upgrade" in the MCTL and Resource column.

m n

o v103chart.inf v103chart.inf

q) Click execution button.


r) Once Start-up message "NOTE L191-0" appeared, click "Yes".
s) Once remote menu of application software version up appears, select "V103chart.inf" and
click start button.
(It takes around 3 min to complete.)
t) Click "Back" button. And go to home screen.

v103chart.inf

⁄2-7 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4) Confirm the version by 1:Setup / F: Version display
1) Confirm the version on the screen for Input Unit.
The version display for Film scanner, FSDRV.DLL and MFS.SYS may be not the same as the
below image because of the original software version.
V0.67 for Film scanner, V0.21R02 for FSDRV.DLL and V0.07R00 for MFS.SYS are OK.

2) Confirm the version on the screen for Printer Unit.

3) Click "Home"

⁄2-8 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
5) Post-check after version up
1) Film scanner setup
Mode: 1. Setup → 12. Individual setup → 122. Setup film scanner
a) Select carrier types in use.
b) Following display, set carrier and click Start setup button.

Follow display for other carriers if any.

2) Confirm various prints:


・ Print sample prints for checking after version up.
(e.g.)
・ 135 negative film: 3R or 4R
・ Digital still camera: 3R or 4R
・ Print to Print: 3R or 4R
3) Print Head calibration
Mode: 1. Setup → 12 Individual setup → 124 Head calibration
(Note: The MUCS is new chart with gray color and 166mm length.)
4) Print Master channel setup
Mode: 1. Setup → 12 Individual setup → 125 Master channel setup
5) Input station data backup
a) Mode: 1. Setup → 15 Manage data → 151 Create backup data copy
b) Select Input Station tab.
c) Confirm that "Specify to which" is C:\ and D:\.
d) Click "Create backup copy" button.
(Backup folder will be created in C:\Temp and D:\Temp.)
6) Printer data backup
i) 1.Setup → 15 Manage data → 151 Create backup data copy
j) Confirm that tag is printer
k) Check "Specify to which" is C:\.
l) Click Create backup copy button. Click the YES button on the message that appears.
(Backup folder will be created in C:\Temp folder.)

⁄2-9 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
13. EPSON ES-2200 UPGRADING PROCEDURE

13-1. EPSON ES-2200 driver "2.1.0.100" installation procedure


Background and Purpose:
The new model of EPSON ES-2200 flat bed scanner made in Indonesia will be released to use for R1
Super as the standard unit. This is the procedure to install the driver for it. This driver version is
compatible to the current model of ES-2200.

Note:
This driver upgrading must be done at the same timing as upgrading to V1.03R01 for DS-1000 to
prevent replacement trouble to the new one in future.

Procedure:
1 Log in as "Administrator", after quit the R1 application if started.

2 Right click on "My Computer" and select "Properties".

3 Select "HardWare" and click "Device Manager".

4 Double click on "Imaging devices", and right click on "EPSON Expression1680".

⁄3-1 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
5 Select "Driver" and confirm "2.1.0.0" as "Driver Version". Click "Update Driver".

6 Click "Next".

7 Select "Search for a suitable driver" and Click "Next".

⁄3-2 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
8 Select "Specify a location" and click "Next".

9 Click "Browse" and select "C:\drivers\EPSON\ES2200\English". Click "OK"

!0 Click "Next"

⁄3-3 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
!1 Click "Yes"

!2 Click "Finish".

!3 Confirm the version "2.1.0.100" as "Driver Version". And click "close".

⁄3-4 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
!4 Click "Yes" to restart the computer.

!5 Confirm the driver upgrading by "Print to Print" operation after R1 application restart.
Completed.

⁄3-5 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
13-2. EPSON ES-2200 driver upgrading procedure from different
firmware version to "2.1.0.100"

When you replace the new flat bet scanner with the different firmware version from the current version,
the new flat bet scanner is not recognized on the system. This is the driver upgrading procedure for it.

Case 1;
In case you replace the flat bed scanner and log in as "Administrator", the below dialog comes on the
screen.
And click "Yes" to recognize the flatbed scanner.

The recognition is completed.

Case 2;
In case you replace the flat bet scanner and start R1 application (log in as R1), the new driver is
upgraded by the following procedure.
1 When you quit the R1 Application, the below message comes on the screen and click "OK".

2 Log in as "Administrator" after log off "r1".

3 Right click on "My Computer" on the desktop and select "Properties".

4 Select "HardWare" and click "Device Manager".

⁄3-6 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
5 Select "EPSON SCANNER ES-2200 SCSI Processor Device" in "Imaging devices" and right click
on it.

6 Click "Update Driver".

7 Follow the step 6 in "EPSON ES-2200 driver install procedure"

⁄3-7 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
14. FPGA PROGRAM WRITING PROCEDURE

[Tools]

1) PC which has Windows 95, 98, ME, 2000


or XP. And also has parallel I/F (36 pin)
2) ByteBlaster or equal product
Made by HuMANDATA LTD.(HDL)
3) R1-FPGA CD-ROM (2002.09.27. including
MAX+plusII free software. The latest version is
ASAP2_1021.exe: 14MB )
4) Download data files

[Installation Procedure]

1 Insert R1-FPGA CD-ROM to PC.


2 Double click ASAP2_1021.exe. After that it self-uncompresses automatically.
3 Installer of MAX+plusII automatically starts. Click "next" after indicating Welcome
message.
4 Software license agreement message is displayed. Click YES.
5 Input user name and company name on user information screen.
6 Mark "MAX+plusII ProgrammerOnlyFiles", "MAX+plusII Helps", "MAX+plusII ReadMeFile"
and select next.
(If you install from default folder to other folder, input the folder name which you want to
set.)
7 Check the folder name and select next on Select Program Folder screen.
After this procedure the installation is started automatically.
8 Make a shortcut icon of maxstart.exe by Explorer on home screen.

[Driver installation for ByteBlaster]

When the PC works on Windows 2000 or XP, the driver for ByteBlaster is required. Refer to
the "ByteBlaster driver installation procedure".

⁄4-1 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
BYTEBLASTER Driver installation procedure

[In case of Windows XP]

1 Choose Control Panel (Windows Start menu). In the Control Panel window, double-clic
"Add Hardware" and click" Next". The Add Hardware wizard appears.

2 Click "Nex". Wait for a while.

⁄4-2 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3 In the first page of the Add Hardware wizard, select "Yes", Select "I have already
connected the hardware", and choose "Next".

4 Select "Add a new Hardware Device" and "Next".

5 Select "Install the hardware that I manually select from a list (M)" and choose "Next".

⁄4-3 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6 Select "Sound, video and game controllers" and click "Next".

7 Click "Have disk".

8 Specify the full directory path to the ¥maxplus2¥drivers¥win2000 directory with


Browse (...) and click "OK".

⁄4-4 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
9 Select "Altera ByteBlaster" and click "Next".

!0 Confirm "Altera ByteBlaster" and click "Next".

!1 Choose "Continue" in a software installation warning appears.

⁄4-5 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
!2 When the window for "Need a file", select the same path in the step 8 again. And "OK"
and Click "Next".

!3 Click "Finish" to end.

!4 When prompted to restart your computer, choose "Yes".

[In case of Windows 2000]

Follow the procedure of Windows 2000.

[Setting]

1 Start MAX+plusII.
2 Select MAX+plusII/Programmer and shows the hardware setup.
3 Select ByteBlaster(MV) in the hardware type, and confirm the LPT1:(0x3478)

⁄4-6 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
[Connection of ByteBlaster]

1 Connect ByteBlaster cable to the printer port of PC

[Procedure for HDC-PCI and HEAD-BUFF board ]

(1) Startup PC which MAX+plusII is installed.


(2) Copy all data at folder ¥r1¥ from CD-ROM to c:¥.
(3) Turn on the machine.
(4) Quit the application by pressing the Idle/off. (Do not turn off the machine)
(5) Connect Byteplaster to each target connector. (Refer to note below.)
(6) Start MAX+plusII program.
(7) Select MAX+plusII/Programmer and start the programmer.
(8) Select JTAG/ Restore JCF, select JCR file to write.

JCF file name target connector


1 HDC PCI board c:¥r1¥hdc-pci¥v???.jcf (currently v131) MCN2 on HDC-PCI board
2 HEAD-BUFF board c:¥r1¥head-buff¥v???.jcf (currently v11) HBCN6 on HEAD-BUFF board
Confirm File name, Device selection and Checksum value.

(9) Once you click "Program" button, it starts writing. (Program → Verify)

Start button

(10) Once OK is displayed, disconnect ByteBlaster from circuit board and power down the
target circuit board.

⁄4-7 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Location of connectors at each board (Confirm #1 pin on board first and set the
reverse triangle mark near brown line to #1 pin on board)

1) HDC-PCI

MCN2

DIPsw MCN2

#1 pin

HDC-PCI board

2) HEAD-BUF

HBCN6

HEAD-BUF board

#1 pin

DIPsw

⁄4-8 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
15. DS-1000 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE TO V1.03R01 BY APPLICATION CD-ROM

Note:
There are 4 types of PC for DS-1000. When you install the software, use the proper
application CD as shown below.

Part Number of PC PC ID No. Applicable Application CD-ROM


Japanese 270087001C IJC* DS-1000 Application J IJC*
English 270287001C IEC* DS-1000 Application E IEC*
Japanese 270087004A (New Type) IJ2A* DS-1000 Application J IJ2A*
English 270287002A (New Type) IE2A* DS-1000 Application E IE2A*
PC ID No. is mentioned on the lower part of front panel of the PC.

1. Tools
1) DS-1000 Application E V1.0301E CD-ROM 1/2 & 2/2 (2 disks)
2) DS-1000 System E V1.03R01E CD-ROM (1 disk)

2. Software Installation flow for V1.03R01

1. Preparation

2. Software installation

3. Upgrading of film scanner driver

4. Setting of CDR drive recognition

5. Upgrading of application for Input station

Upgrading of carrier firmware

6. Post check after upgrading

Confirmation of version

Film scanner setup

⁄5-1 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
2. Hard disk installation

1) Turn on breaker which is at the left side of Film Scanner of Input Station.

2) BIOS setting
Click F2 key at the display of "ES-2200" in PC's startup screen to go into BIOS setting.

(1) Advanced setting


Check "IDE Configuration → Secondary IDE Master" is CD-W540E.
(In case of the proto model, CD-W524E is selected.
(2) Boot setting
Change "Boot Device Priority → 1st Boot Device" to [ATAPI CD-ROM].

3) Insert "DS-1000 Application E V1.03R01E CD-ROM 1/2" to CD drive.

4) Save BIOS setting and restart.

5) In startup screen, "CAUTION" will be displayed. Click any button on keyboard.

6) "Select Norton Ghost2002 License Number" will be displayed. Key in;


31350430BAAB
and click OK.

7) At the left bottom of screen, "Question" will be displayed then click "Yes" key.

8) "Question" will be displayed again, then click Yes key.


From here, program starts Ghost image restoration process.

9) While it is in restoration, "Span Volume [1] Done" will be displayed.


Insert "DS-1000 Application E V1.01R01 CD-ROM 2/2" to CD drive and click OK.

10) Once it completed the restoration, "No batch missing" will be displayed and
command prompt display, remove CD-ROM and restart Input station PC.

11) Change back BIOS setting to previous one.

12) After restart, if restart request is displayed, click Yes key to restart Input Station PC.

⁄5-2 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
3. Update Film Scanner Driver

(1) Press Ctlr+Alt+Del key to go into "Window security" screen.


(2) Click Logoff.
(3) Once Logon screen displayed,
User name : Administrator
Password : no password (space)
Then click OK.
(4) Insert "DS-1000 System E V1.03R01E CD-ROM" into CD drive.
(5) Open property right-clicking My Computer icon on desk top.
(6) Click "Device manager" in "Hardware" tab.
(7) Click "+" mark on the tree of "DRS Protocol Device", to display "MFS Film Scanner."
(8) Open property of "MFS Film Scanner."
(9) Click "Update driver" button in "Driver" tab.
(10) Once dialog is displayed, click next button.
(11) Select "Display known drivers of this device and select from the list," Open and click
OK.
(12) Click "Have disk" button.
(13) Click "Browse" button, select
C: ¥Program Files¥rsystem¥r1¥vup¥RSCAN¥DRIVER¥MFS.inf
(14) Click Next.
(15) Once "Start installation," then click "Next".
(16) Click completed.
(17) Confirm the driver version "1.0.0.0" or "0.21.2.0" in "Driver" tab.

4. Recognition for CD-ROM.

a) Open the Explore and select below folder.


C: ¥Program Files¥rsystem¥CDR
b) Double click shortcut of CDROMEnable-E in the folder.
Once the error message comes up, click "OK" and retry it.

c) Click "Previous".

5. Restart the Input station

a) Display task bar by clicking on the "Windows" key on the full size keyboard.
b) From the taskbar, Select Start → Shut down.
c) Select "Restart" and click OK button.

⁄5-3 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
6. Upgrading of application for Input station

(1) AFC firmware version up


From the Home screen select 2. Maintenance → 26 Version up
a) Confirm that referring file is "AFC103r1.mot." If not, click Select file button and
look for the right one.

b) Check AFC column and click download button.


(It takes around 6 min to complete.)

(2) Quit Input Station Application


1) Click Quit button in home screen.
2) Click Quit in end screen.
3) If Post-production procedure is displayed, Cancel → Quit.

(3) Shut down of input station.


1) Turn off power switch at the left side of film scanner.
2) Wait for UPS sound (Powering off of input station PC) surely.

⁄5-4 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
7. Post check after upgrading

(1) Confirm the version by 1:Setup / F: Version display


1) Confirm the version on the screen for Input Unit.
The version display for Film scanner, FSDRV.DLL and MFS.SYS may be not the
same as the below image because of the original software version.
V0.67 for Film scanner, V0.21R02 for FSDRV.DLL and V0.07R00 for MFS.SYS
are OK.
2) Confirm the version on the screen for DS-1000.

3) Click "Home"

⁄5-5 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
(2) Post-check after version up
1) Film scanner setup
Mode: 1. Setup – 12. Individual setup – 122. Setup film scanner
a) Select carrier types in use.
b) Following display, set carrier and click Start setup button.

Follow display for other carriers if any.


2) Print Head calibration
Mode: 1. Setup – 12 Individual setup – 124 Head calibration
(Note: The MUCS is new chart with gray color and 166mm length.)
3) Print Master channel setup
Mode: 1. Setup – 12 Individual setup – 125 Master channel setup
4) Input station data backup
a) Mode: 1. Setup – 15 Manage data – 151 Create backup data copy
b) Select Input Station tab.
c) Confirm that "Specify to which" is C:¥ and D:¥.
d) Click "Create backup copy" button.
(Backup folder will be created in C:¥Temp and D:¥Temp.)

⁄5-6 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
16. DP-1000 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE TO V1.03R01 BY APPLICATION CD-ROM

[Tools]

1) DP-1000 Application J/E V1.03R01 1/2 and 2/2 2 pcs of CD-ROM


2) 1 unit of DS-1000 connected to DP-1000 by LAN

[Procedure]

1. Hard disk installation (Ghost)


1) Turn off at breaker on DP-1000 and DS-1000.
2) Take out both HDD of DP-1000 and HDD (Drive: C) of DS-1000 after beep sound is
gone.
3) Insert HDD of DP-1000 into the drive C on PC for DS-1000
4) Turn on at breaker on DS-1000
5) BIOS setting of DS-1000
Click "F2" key at the "ES-2200" display in PC startup screen to go to BIOS setting.
(1) Advanced setting
Check "IDE Configuration → Secondary IDE Master" is CD-W540E.
(In case of the proto model, CD-W524E is selected.
(2) Boot setting
Change "Boot Device Priority → 1st Boot Device" to [ATAPI CD-ROM].Boot setting
Boot Device Priority → 1st Boot device to [Removable Drive]
Note: You need to return the setting after Ghost, please note the setting here.
6) Insert DP-1000 Application J/E (1/2) CD-ROM in DS-1000 CD drive.
7) Save BIOS setting and restart.
8) When a caution message comes on, click any key.
9) In startup screen, "CAUTION" will be displayed. Click any button on keyboard.
"Select Norton Ghost2002 License Number" will be displayed. Key in;
31350430BAAB
and click OK.
10) At the left bottom of screen, "Question" will be displayed then click "Yes" key.
11) "Question" will be displayed again, then click Yes key.
From here, program starts Ghost image restoration process.
12) While it is in restoration, "Span Volume [1] Done" will be displayed.
Insert "DP-1000 Application J/E V1.03R01 CD-ROM 2/2" to CD drive and click OK.
It will take 10 minutes to restration.
13) Once it completed the restoration, "No batch file Q:¥>" will be displayed and
command prompt display,
remove CD-ROM and restart Input station PC.
14) Return DS-1000 BIOS setting to original.
15) Turn off the input station.
16) Take out the HDD of DP-1000 in DS-1000 (Drive: C) after beep sound is gone. And
Insert HDD of DP-1000 into the PC for DP-1000. Insert the HDD of DS-1000 back to
the PC of DS-1000.
17) Turn on both DP-1000 and DS-1000.

⁄6-1 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
2. Firmware download; by Printer LCD screen operation
1) PFU BOOT and Printer-CPU BOOT download.
If the current version display is V1.00R1, it is not necessary to version up at this
moment.
If not, refer to the "version up procedure of MCTL BOOT and PFU BOOT"
2) LCD program download
Mode → Maintenance → Version up → LCD program
If current version display is V0.50R1, it is not necessary to version up at this moment.
Select LCD050R1.mot and click start button. It takes 3 min.
3) LCD font data download
Mode → Maintenance → Version up → LCD information
Select language "English", then click start button.
It takes around 90 seconds.
4) Printer-CPU program download
Mode → Maintenance → Version up → Printer-CPU
If current version display is V1.01R1, it is not necessary to version up at this moment.
Select Mctl103R1.mot and click start button.
It takes 4 min.
5) PFU program download
Mode → Maintenance → Version up → PFU-DRV
If current version display is V1.00R1, it is not necessary to version up at this moment.
Select PFU100R1.mot and click start button.
It takes 4 min.

3. Post check after upgrading


(1) Confirm the version by 1:Setup / F: Version display
1) Confirm the version on the screen for Printer Unit.

2) Click "Home"

⁄6-2 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
4. System setting; Printer LCD screen operation

1) Mode → Maintenance → System configuration setting


2) Select language on system screen.

Selection of Japanese or English

3) Display Developing section screen in "System configuration setting " by selecting


Mode/2.Maintenance/9.System configuration/Processor.

1 Select processor type


(Models are shown in the
following order repeatedly.)

When 868-SQA is selected (NPS-


868SQA is connected), select
"Present" for P3 temperature
control if optional P3 temperature
control unit is mounted.

2 Press "Rgstr ".

⁄6-3 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
Display name Processor type
868S-J NPS-868 Super J
878S-J NPS-878 Super J, NPS-878 J
868S-SQA NPS-868 Super SQA
878S-SQA NPS-878 Super SQA, NPS-878 SQA
828S-SQA NPS-828 Super , NPS-838 Super
868-SQA NPS-868SQA

Rules on display name

868 S - SQA

SQA: SQA Type


J: J Type
S: Super

System name

3 "Restart system" window appears. Press "OK".


(The following shows an example when 868S-J is selected.)

4 Wait for 3 to 4 minutes before the PC completes restarting.

⁄6-4 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
17. APPENDIX: CHECK SHEET

【3】
】 S/N number check list

Check and record the items that were modified.

<Unit number check sheet> Machine number: ( )

(1) Input station unit

Serial number
No. Unit name
Early Replace 1 Replace 2
Main unit
1 Image scanning section
2 AFC-CPU Board
3 DC-TRM Board
4 ScannerDriving Board
Power supply unit
1 SUP1
2 SUP2
Light source unit
1 Light source unit
2 LS-LED-A Board
3 LS-LED-B Board
PC unit
1 PC unit
2 Extended keyboard
3 Flatbed scanner
4 HUB
5 CRT
Other
1 Film cleaner

⁄7-1 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
(2) 135AFC

Serial number
No. Unit name
Early Replace 1 Replace 2
135AFC
1 135 AFC unit
2 PD-AMP Board

(3) 240AFC

Serial number
No. Unit name
Early Replace 1 Replace 2
240AFC
1 240AFC unit
2 PD-AMP Board
3 MAG-AMP Board

(3) Universal carrier

Serial number
No. Unit name
Early Replace 1 Replace 2
Universal carrier
1 Universal carrier

⁄7-2 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6
[Checking the optical axis in the sub-scan direction (only when UFC is used)]
Shim size check sheet

Shim size (0.1mm units) Evaluation value (Left) Shim adjustment size (0.1mm units)
Sort Left Right
Right No.
Left Left R G B Add when evaluation Add when evaluation
front
when value Left) is <-5 value (Left) is >5
Initial
After 1st
adjustment
After 2nd
adjustment
After 3rd
adjustment
After 4th
adjustment
After 5th
adjustment

⁄7-3 2700YE600C
Mar. 2003

fineline6

You might also like